updated for version 7.3.768

Problem:    settabvar() and setwinvar() may move the cursor.
Solution:   Save and restore the cursor position when appropriate. (idea by
            Yasuhiro Matsumoto)

.gitignore

@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ src/auto/pathdef.c
 *.suo
 *.res
 *.RES
+src/if_perl.c
 src/pathdef.c
 src/Obj*/pathdef.c
 gvimext.dll
@@ -41,11 +42,13 @@ gvimext.lib
 *.mo
 *.swp
 *~
+src/po/vim.pot
 
 # Generated by "make test"
 src/po/*.ck 
 src/testdir/mbyte.vim 
 src/testdir/mzscheme.vim 
+src/testdir/lua.vim 
 src/testdir/small.vim 
 src/testdir/tiny.vim 
 src/testdir/test*.out

Filelist

@@ -261,6 +261,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/Make_mvc.mak \
 		src/Make_w16.mak \
 		src/bigvim.bat \
+		src/bigvim64.bat \
 		src/msvcsetup.bat \
 		src/msvc2008.bat \
 		src/msvc2010.bat \
@@ -349,6 +350,13 @@ SRC_DOS_BIN =	\
 		src/vim*.ico \
 		src/vim.tlb \
 		src/vimtbar.lib \
+		src/xpm/COPYRIGHT \
+		src/xpm/README.txt \
+		src/xpm/include/*.h \
+		src/xpm/x64/lib/libXpm.a \
+		src/xpm/x64/lib/libXpm.lib \
+		src/xpm/x86/lib/libXpm.a \
+		src/xpm/x86/lib/libXpm.lib \
 		src/vimtbar.dll \
 		nsis/icons/*.bmp \
 		nsis/icons/*.ico \
@@ -463,6 +471,7 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/macros/hanoi/hanoi.vim \
 		runtime/macros/hanoi/poster \
 		runtime/macros/justify.vim \
+		runtime/macros/less.bat \
 		runtime/macros/less.sh \
 		runtime/macros/less.vim \
 		runtime/macros/life/click.me \
@@ -666,6 +675,8 @@ EXTRA =		\
 
 # generic language files
 LANG_GEN = \
+		runtime/doc/*-de.1 \
+		runtime/doc/*-de.UTF-8.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-fr.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-fr.UTF-8.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-it.1 \
@@ -682,9 +693,17 @@ LANG_GEN = \
 		runtime/tutor/Makefile \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.utf-8 \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.?? \
-		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.* \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.utf-8 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.euc \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.sjis \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.iso9 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.big5 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.cp1250 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.cp1251 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.cp737 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??_??.utf-8 \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.bar \
-		runtime/tutor/tutor.bar.* \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.bar.utf-8 \
 		runtime/spell/README.txt \
 		runtime/spell/??/*.diff \
 		runtime/spell/??/main.aap \

README.txt

@@ -97,10 +97,12 @@ The latest news about Vim can be found on the Vim home page:
 If you have problems, have a look at the Vim FAQ:
 	http://vimdoc.sf.net/vimfaq.html
 
-Send bug reports to:
-	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+If you still have problems or any other questions, use one of the mailing
+lists to discuss them with Vim users and developers:
+	http://www.vim.org/maillist.php
 
-There are several mailing lists for Vim, see http://www.vim.org/maillist.php.
+If nothing else works, report bugs directly:
+	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
 
 
 MAIN AUTHOR

runtime/autoload/ada.vim

@@ -29,6 +29,8 @@
 if version < 700
    finish
 endif 
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 " Section: Constants {{{1
 "
@@ -619,6 +621,9 @@ lockvar  g:ada#Comment
 lockvar! g:ada#Keywords
 lockvar! g:ada#Ctags_Kinds
 
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 finish " 1}}}
 
 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------

runtime/autoload/ccomplete.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	C
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2011 Dec 30
+" Last Change:	2012 Jun 20
 
 let s:cpo_save = &cpo
 set cpo&vim
@@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ function! s:StructMembers(typename, items, all)
   endif
   if !cached
     while 1
-      exe 'silent! ' . n . 'vimgrep /\t' . typename . '\(\t\|$\)/j ' . fnames
+      exe 'silent! keepj noautocmd ' . n . 'vimgrep /\t' . typename . '\(\t\|$\)/j ' . fnames
 
       let qflist = getqflist()
       if len(qflist) > 0 || match(typename, "::") < 0

runtime/autoload/netrwFileHandlers.vim

@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 " netrwFileHandlers: contains various extension-based file handlers for
 "                    netrw's browsers' x command ("eXecute launcher")
 " Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
-" Date:		Sep 30, 2008
-" Version:	10
-" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2008 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
+" Date:		Mar 14, 2012
+" Version:	11a
+" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2012 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
 "               Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
 "               with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
 "               notice is copied with it. Like anything else that's free,
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 if exists("g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers") || &cp
  finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers= "v10"
+let g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers= "v11a"
 if v:version < 702
  echohl WarningMsg
  echo "***warning*** this version of netrwFileHandlers needs vim 7.2"
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ fun! netrwFileHandlers#Invoke(exten,fname)
 "   call Decho("let ret= netrwFileHandlers#NFH_".a:exten.'("'.fname.'")')
    exe "let ret= s:NFH_".a:exten.'("'.fname.'")'
   endif
-  
+
 "  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#Invoke 0 : ret=".ret)
   return 0
 endfun
@@ -356,6 +356,7 @@ fun! s:NFH_obj(obj)
 endfun
 
 let &cpo= s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 "  Modelines: {{{1
 "  vim: fdm=marker

runtime/autoload/netrwSettings.vim

@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ fun! netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
    put = 'let g:netrw_browsex_viewer    = (not defined)'
   endif
   put = 'let g:netrw_compress          = '.g:netrw_compress
-  put = 'let g:netrw_cursorline        = '.g:netrw_cursorline
+  put = 'let g:netrw_cursor            = '.g:netrw_cursor
   let decompressline= line("$")
   put ='let g:netrw_decompress...'
   put = 'let g:netrw_dirhistmax        = '.g:netrw_dirhistmax
@@ -125,9 +125,9 @@ fun! netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
   put = 'let g:netrw_list_hide         = '.g:netrw_list_hide
   put = 'let g:netrw_liststyle         = '.g:netrw_liststyle
   put = 'let g:netrw_localcopycmd      = '.g:netrw_localcopycmd
-  put = 'let g:netrw_local_mkdir       = '.g:netrw_local_mkdir
+  put = 'let g:netrw_localmkdir        = '.g:netrw_localmkdir
   put = 'let g:netrw_localmovecmd      = '.g:netrw_localmovecmd
-  put = 'let g:netrw_local_rmdir       = '.g:netrw_local_rmdir
+  put = 'let g:netrw_localrmdir       = '.g:netrw_localrmdir
   put = 'let g:netrw_maxfilenamelen    = '.g:netrw_maxfilenamelen
   put = 'let g:netrw_menu              = '.g:netrw_menu
   put = 'let g:netrw_mkdir_cmd         = '.g:netrw_mkdir_cmd

runtime/autoload/sqlcomplete.vim

@@ -1,23 +1,43 @@
 " Vim OMNI completion script for SQL
 " Language:    SQL
 " Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn dot vim at gmail dot com>
-" Version:     12.0
-" Last Change: 2012 Feb 08
+" Version:     14.0
+" Last Change: 2012 Dec 04
+" Homepage:    http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=1572
 " Usage:       For detailed help
 "              ":help sql.txt"
 "              or ":help ft-sql-omni"
 "              or read $VIMRUNTIME/doc/sql.txt
 
 " History
-" Version 12.0
+"
+" Version 14.0 (Dec 2012)
+"     - BF: Added check for cpo
+"
+" Version 13.0 (Dec 2012)
+"     - NF: When completing column lists or drilling into a table
+"           and g:omni_sql_include_owner is enabled, the
+"           only the table name would be replaced with the column
+"           list instead of the table name and owner (if specified).
+"     - NF: When completing column lists using table aliases
+"           and g:omni_sql_include_owner is enabled, account
+"           for the owner name when looking up the table
+"           list instead of the table name and owner (if specified).
+"     - BF: When completing column lists or drilling into a table
+"           and g:omni_sql_include_owner is enabled, the
+"           column list could often not be found for the table.
+"     - BF: When OMNI popped up, possibly the wrong word
+"           would be replaced for column and column list options.
+"
+" Version 12.0 (Feb 2012)
 "     - Partial column name completion did not work when a table
 "       name or table alias was provided (Jonas Enberg).
 "     - Improved the handling of column completion.  First we match any
 "       columns from a previous completion.  If not matches are found, we
-"       consider the partial name to be a table or table alias for the 
+"       consider the partial name to be a table or table alias for the
 "       query and attempt to match on it.
 "
-" Version 11.0
+" Version 11.0 (Jan 2012)
 "     Added g:omni_sql_default_compl_type variable
 "         - You can specify which type of completion to default to
 "           when pressing <C-X><C-O>.  The entire list of available
@@ -40,7 +60,7 @@
 "         - Prepends error message with SQLComplete so you know who issued
 "           the error.
 "
-" Version 9.0
+" Version 9.0 (May 2010)
 "     This change removes some of the support for tables with spaces in their
 "     names in order to simplify the regexes used to pull out query table
 "     aliases for more robust table name and column name code completion.
@@ -51,10 +71,10 @@
 "     Incorrectly re-executed the g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right and g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_left
 "     when drilling in and out of a column list for a table.
 "
-" Version 7.0
+" Version 7.0 (Jan 2010)
 "     Better handling of object names
 "
-" Version 6.0
+" Version 6.0 (Apr 2008)
 "     Supports object names with spaces "my table name"
 "
 " Set completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O to autoloaded function.
@@ -71,7 +91,9 @@ endif
 if exists('g:loaded_sql_completion')
     finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_sql_completion = 120
+let g:loaded_sql_completion = 130
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 " Maintains filename of dictionary
 let s:sql_file_table        = ""
@@ -137,6 +159,13 @@ if !exists('g:omni_sql_default_compl_type')
 endif
 
 " This function is used for the 'omnifunc' option.
+" It is called twice by omni and it is responsible
+" for returning the completion list of items.
+" But it must also determine context of what to complete
+" and what to "replace" with the completion.
+" The a:base, is replaced directly with what the user
+" chooses from the choices.
+" The s:prepend provides context for the completion.
 function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
 
     " Default to table name completion
@@ -145,6 +174,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
     if exists('b:sql_compl_type')
         let compl_type = b:sql_compl_type
     endif
+    let begindot = 0
 
     " First pass through this function determines how much of the line should
     " be replaced by whatever is chosen from the completion list
@@ -153,7 +183,6 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
         let line     = getline('.')
         let start    = col('.') - 1
         let lastword = -1
-        let begindot = 0
         " Check if the first character is a ".", for column completion
         if line[start - 1] == '.'
             let begindot = 1
@@ -179,7 +208,10 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
                 " If lastword has already been set for column completion
                 " break from the loop, since we do not also want to pickup
                 " a table name if it was also supplied.
+                " Unless g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1, then we can
+                " include the ownername.
                 if lastword != -1 && compl_type == 'column'
+                            \ && g:omni_sql_include_owner == 0
                     break
                 endif
                 " If column completion was specified stop at the "." if
@@ -191,7 +223,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
                 " If omni_sql_include_owner = 0, do not include the table
                 " name as part of the substitution, so break here
                 if lastword == -1 &&
-                            \ compl_type =~ 'table\|view\|procedure\column_csv' &&
+                            \ compl_type =~ '\<\(table\|view\|procedure\|column\|column_csv\)\>' &&
                             \ g:omni_sql_include_owner == 0
                     let lastword = start
                     break
@@ -288,6 +320,12 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
             let table  = matchstr( base, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze\..*' )
             let column = matchstr( base, '.*\.\zs.*' )
 
+            if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner == '' && table != '' && column != ''
+                let owner  = table
+                let table  = column
+                let column = ''
+            endif
+
             " It is pretty well impossible to determine if the user
             " has entered:
             "    owner.table
@@ -370,7 +408,16 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
                 let list_type     = 'csv'
             endif
 
-            let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(table, list_type)
+            " If we are including the OWNER for the objects, then for
+            " table completion, if we have it, it should be included
+            " as there can be the same table names in a database yet
+            " with different owner names.
+            if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner != '' && table != ''
+                let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(owner.'.'.table, list_type)
+            else
+                let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(table, list_type)
+            endif
+
             if column != ''
                 " If no column prefix has been provided and the table
                 " name was provided, append it to each of the items
@@ -393,11 +440,14 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
         endif
     elseif compl_type == 'resetCache'
         " Reset all cached items
-        let s:tbl_name  = []
-        let s:tbl_alias = []
-        let s:tbl_cols  = []
-        let s:syn_list  = []
-        let s:syn_value = []
+        let s:tbl_name           = []
+        let s:tbl_alias          = []
+        let s:tbl_cols           = []
+        let s:syn_list           = []
+        let s:syn_value          = []
+        let s:sql_file_table     = ""
+        let s:sql_file_procedure = ""
+        let s:sql_file_view      = ""
 
         let msg = "All SQL cached items have been removed."
         call s:SQLCWarningMsg(msg)
@@ -423,12 +473,27 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
         " let expr = 'v:val '.(g:omni_sql_ignorecase==1?'=~?':'=~#').' "\\(^'.base.'\\|\\(\\.\\)\\?'.base.'\\)"'
         " let expr = 'v:val '.(g:omni_sql_ignorecase==1?'=~?':'=~#').' "\\(^'.base.'\\|\\([^.]*\\)\\?'.base.'\\)"'
         let compl_list = filter(deepcopy(compl_list), expr)
+
+        if empty(compl_list) && compl_type == 'table' && base =~ '\.$'
+            " It is possible we could be looking for column name completion
+            " and the user simply hit C-X C-O to lets try it as well
+            " since we had no hits with the tables.
+            " If the base ends with a . it is hard to know if we are
+            " completing table names or column names.
+            let list_type = ''
+
+            let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(base, list_type)
+        endif
     endif
 
     if exists('b:sql_compl_savefunc') && b:sql_compl_savefunc != ""
         let &omnifunc = b:sql_compl_savefunc
     endif
 
+    if empty(compl_list)
+        call s:SQLCWarningMsg( 'Could not find type['.compl_type.'] using prepend[.'.s:prepended.'] base['.a:base.']' )
+    endif
+
     return compl_list
 endfunc
 
@@ -664,8 +729,26 @@ function! s:SQLCGetObjectOwner(object)
 endfunction
 
 function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
+    if a:table_name =~ '\.'
+        " Check if the owner/creator has been specified
+        let owner  = matchstr( a:table_name, '^\zs.*\ze\..*\..*' )
+        let table  = matchstr( a:table_name, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze\..*' )
+        let column = matchstr( a:table_name, '.*\.\zs.*' )
+
+        if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner == '' && table != '' && column != ''
+            let owner  = table
+            let table  = column
+            let column = ''
+        endif
+    else
+        let owner  = ''
+        let table  = matchstr(a:table_name, '^["\[\]a-zA-Z0-9_ ]\+\ze\.\?')
+        let column = ''
+    endif
+
     " Check if the table name was provided as part of the column name
-    let table_name   = matchstr(a:table_name, '^["\[\]a-zA-Z0-9_ ]\+\ze\.\?')
+    " let table_name   = matchstr(a:table_name, '^["\[\]a-zA-Z0-9_ ]\+\ze\.\?')
+    let table_name   = table
     let table_cols   = []
     let table_alias  = ''
     let move_to_top  = 1
@@ -786,7 +869,12 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
 
              if table_name_new != ''
                  let table_alias = table_name
-                 let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze' )
+                 if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1
+                    let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\zs\(.\{-}\.\)\?\(.\{-}\.\)\?.*\ze' )
+                 else
+                     " let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze' )
+                    let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\(.\{-}\.\)\?\zs\(.\{-}\.\)\?.*\ze' )
+                 endif
 
                  let list_idx = index(s:tbl_name, table_name, 0, &ignorecase)
                  if list_idx > -1
@@ -828,7 +916,8 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
     if empty(table_cols)
         " Specify silent mode, no messages to the user (tbl, 1)
         " Specify do not comma separate (tbl, 1, 1)
-        let table_cols_str = DB_getListColumn(table_name, 1, 1)
+        " let table_cols_str = DB_getListColumn(table_name, 1, 1)
+        let table_cols_str = DB_getListColumn((owner!=''?owner.'.':'').table_name, 1, 1)
 
         if table_cols_str != ""
             let s:tbl_name  = add( s:tbl_name,  table_name )
@@ -854,3 +943,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
 
     return table_cols
 endfunction
+"  Restore:
+let &cpo= s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+" vim: ts=4 fdm=marker

runtime/autoload/syntaxcomplete.vim

@@ -1,12 +1,32 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:    All languages, uses existing syntax highlighting rules
 " Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn dot vim at gmail dot com>
-" Version:     8.0
-" Last Change: 2011 Nov 02
-" Usage:       For detailed help, ":help ft-syntax-omni" 
+" Version:     11.0
+" Last Change: 2012 Dec 04
+" Usage:       For detailed help, ":help ft-syntax-omni"
 
 " History
 "
+" Version 11.0
+"     Corrected which characters required escaping during
+"     substitution calls.
+"
+" Version 10.0
+"     Cycle through all the character ranges specified in the
+"     iskeyword option and build a list of valid word separators.
+"     Prior to this change, only actual characters were used,
+"     where for example ASCII "45" == "-".  If "45" were used
+"     in iskeyword the hyphen would not be picked up.
+"     This introduces a new option, since the character ranges
+"     specified could be multibyte:
+"         let g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte = 1
+"     This by default will only allow single byte ASCII
+"     characters to be added and an additional check to ensure
+"     the charater is printable (see documentation for isprint).
+"
+" Version 9.0
+"     Add the check for cpo.
+"
 " Version 8.0
 "     Updated SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems()
 "         - Some additional syntax items were also allowed
@@ -16,7 +36,7 @@
 " Version 7.0
 "     Updated syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
 "         - Looking up the syntax groups defined from a syntax file
-"           looked for only 1 format of {filetype}GroupName, but some 
+"           looked for only 1 format of {filetype}GroupName, but some
 "           syntax writers use this format as well:
 "               {b:current_syntax}GroupName
 "           OmniSyntaxList() will now check for both if the first
@@ -24,11 +44,11 @@
 "
 " Version 6.0
 "     Added syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
-"         - Allows other plugins to use this for their own 
+"         - Allows other plugins to use this for their own
 "           purposes.
 "         - It will return a List of all syntax items for the
-"           syntax group name passed in.  
-"         - XPTemplate for SQL will use this function via the 
+"           syntax group name passed in.
+"         - XPTemplate for SQL will use this function via the
 "           sqlcomplete plugin to populate a Choose box.
 "
 " Version 5.0
@@ -38,7 +58,7 @@
 "
 " Set completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O to autoloaded function.
 " This check is in place in case this script is
-" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature. 
+" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature.
 if exists('+omnifunc')
     " Do not set the option if already set since this
     " results in an E117 warning.
@@ -48,9 +68,13 @@ if exists('+omnifunc')
 endif
 
 if exists('g:loaded_syntax_completion')
-    finish 
+    finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_syntax_completion = 80
+let g:loaded_syntax_completion = 110
+
+" Turn on support for line continuations when creating the script
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 " Set ignorecase to the ftplugin standard
 " This is the default setting, but if you define a buffer local
@@ -67,6 +91,18 @@ if !exists('g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword')
     let g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword = 1
 endif
 
+" When using iskeyword, this setting controls whether the characters
+" should be limited to single byte characters.
+if !exists('g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte')
+    let g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte = 1
+endif
+
+" When using iskeyword, this setting controls whether the characters
+" should be limited to single byte characters.
+if !exists('g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword_numeric')
+    let g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword_numeric = 1
+endif
+
 " Only display items in the completion window that are at least
 " this many characters in length.
 " This is the default setting, but if you define a buffer local
@@ -158,7 +194,7 @@ endfunc
 function! syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList(...)
     if a:0 > 0
         let parms = []
-        if 3 == type(a:1) 
+        if 3 == type(a:1)
             let parms = a:1
         elseif 1 == type(a:1)
             let parms = split(a:1, ',')
@@ -172,7 +208,7 @@ endfunc
 function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
     let list_parms = []
     if a:0 > 0
-        if 3 == type(a:1) 
+        if 3 == type(a:1)
             let list_parms = a:1
         elseif 1 == type(a:1)
             let list_parms = split(a:1, ',')
@@ -208,18 +244,18 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
 
     let saveL = @l
     let filetype = substitute(&filetype, '\.', '_', 'g')
-    
+
     if empty(list_parms)
         " Default the include group to include the requested syntax group
         let syntax_group_include_{filetype} = ''
         " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
         if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_include_'.filetype)
             let syntax_group_include_{filetype} =
-                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
+                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype},'\s\+','','g')
             let list_parms = split(g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype}, ',')
             if syntax_group_include_{filetype} =~ '\w'
-                let syntax_group_include_{filetype} = 
-                            \ substitute( syntax_group_include_{filetype}, 
+                let syntax_group_include_{filetype} =
+                            \ substitute( syntax_group_include_{filetype},
                             \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
                             \ )
             endif
@@ -229,11 +265,11 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
     endif
 
     " Loop through all the syntax groupnames, and build a
-    " syntax file which contains these names.  This can 
+    " syntax file which contains these names.  This can
     " work generically for any filetype that does not already
     " have a plugin defined.
     " This ASSUMES the syntax groupname BEGINS with the name
-    " of the filetype.  From my casual viewing of the vim7\syntax 
+    " of the filetype.  From my casual viewing of the vim7\syntax
     " directory this is true for almost all syntax definitions.
     " As an example, the SQL syntax groups have this pattern:
     "     sqlType
@@ -246,7 +282,7 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
     let syntax_full = "\n".@l
     let @l = saveL
 
-    if syntax_full =~ 'E28' 
+    if syntax_full =~ 'E28'
                 \ || syntax_full =~ 'E411'
                 \ || syntax_full =~ 'E415'
                 \ || syntax_full =~ 'No Syntax items'
@@ -256,7 +292,7 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
     let filetype = substitute(&filetype, '\.', '_', 'g')
 
     let list_exclude_groups = []
-    if a:0 > 0 
+    if a:0 > 0
         " Do nothing since we have specific a specific list of groups
     else
         " Default the exclude group to nothing
@@ -264,11 +300,11 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
         " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
         if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_'.filetype)
             let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =
-                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
+                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},'\s\+','','g')
             let list_exclude_groups = split(g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype}, ',')
-            if syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =~ '\w' 
-                let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} = 
-                            \ substitute( syntax_group_exclude_{filetype}, 
+            if syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =~ '\w'
+                let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =
+                            \ substitute( syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},
                             \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
                             \ )
             endif
@@ -285,14 +321,14 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
     while ftindex > -1
         let ft_part_name = matchstr( &filetype, '\w\+', ftindex )
 
-        " Syntax rules can contain items for more than just the current 
+        " Syntax rules can contain items for more than just the current
         " filetype.  They can contain additional items added by the user
         " via autocmds or their vimrc.
         " Some syntax files can be combined (html, php, jsp).
         " We want only items that begin with the filetype we are interested in.
         let next_group_regex = '\n' .
                     \ '\zs'.ft_part_name.'\w\+\ze'.
-                    \ '\s\+xxx\s\+' 
+                    \ '\s\+xxx\s\+'
         let index    = 0
         let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
 
@@ -306,11 +342,11 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
             "     syn keyword {syntax_filename}Keyword  values ...
             "     let b:current_syntax = "mysql"
             " So, we will make the format of finding the syntax group names
-            " a bit more flexible and look for both if the first fails to 
+            " a bit more flexible and look for both if the first fails to
             " find a match.
             let next_group_regex = '\n' .
                         \ '\zs'.b:current_syntax.'\w\+\ze'.
-                        \ '\s\+xxx\s\+' 
+                        \ '\s\+xxx\s\+'
             let index    = 0
             let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
         endif
@@ -324,9 +360,9 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
                     let get_syn_list = 0
                 endif
             endfor
-        
+
             " This code is no longer needed in version 6.0 since we have
-            " augmented the syntax list command to only retrieve the syntax 
+            " augmented the syntax list command to only retrieve the syntax
             " groups we are interested in.
             "
             " if get_syn_list == 1
@@ -338,7 +374,7 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
             " endif
 
             if get_syn_list == 1
-                " Pass in the full syntax listing, plus the group name we 
+                " Pass in the full syntax listing, plus the group name we
                 " are interested in.
                 let extra_syn_list = s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems(group_name, syntax_full)
                 let syn_list = syn_list . extra_syn_list . "\n"
@@ -392,7 +428,7 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )
     "     \|           - 2nd potential match
     "     \%$          - matches end of the file or string
     "     \)           - end a group
-    let syntax_group = matchstr(a:syntax_full, 
+    let syntax_group = matchstr(a:syntax_full,
                 \ "\n".a:group_name.'\s\+xxx\s\+\zs.\{-}\ze\(\n\w\|\%$\)'
                 \ )
 
@@ -402,42 +438,42 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )
 
         " We only want the words for the lines begining with
         " containedin, but there could be other items.
-        
+
         " Tried to remove all lines that do not begin with contained
         " but this does not work in all cases since you can have
         "    contained nextgroup=...
         " So this will strip off the ending of lines with known
         " keywords.
-        let syn_list = substitute( 
+        let syn_list = substitute(
                     \    syntax_group, '\<\('.
                     \    substitute(
                     \      escape(s:syn_remove_words, '\\/.*$^~[]')
                     \      , ',', '\\|', 'g'
                     \    ).
                     \    '\).\{-}\%($\|'."\n".'\)'
-                    \    , "\n", 'g' 
+                    \    , "\n", 'g'
                     \  )
 
         " Now strip off the newline + blank space + contained.
         " Also include lines with nextgroup=@someName skip_key_words syntax_element
-        let syn_list = substitute( 
+        let syn_list = substitute(
                     \    syn_list, '\%(^\|\n\)\@<=\s*\<\(contained\|nextgroup=\)'
-                    \    , "", 'g' 
+                    \    , "", 'g'
                     \ )
 
         " This can leave lines like this
         "     =@vimMenuList  skipwhite onoremenu
         " Strip the special option keywords first
         "     :h :syn-skipwhite*
-        let syn_list = substitute( 
+        let syn_list = substitute(
                     \    syn_list, '\<\(skipwhite\|skipnl\|skipempty\)\>'
-                    \    , "", 'g' 
+                    \    , "", 'g'
                     \ )
 
         " Now remove the remainder of the nextgroup=@someName lines
-        let syn_list = substitute( 
+        let syn_list = substitute(
                     \    syn_list, '\%(^\|\n\)\@<=\s*\(@\w\+\)'
-                    \    , "", 'g' 
+                    \    , "", 'g'
                     \ )
 
         if b:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword == 0
@@ -446,19 +482,74 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )
             " This will replace non-word characters with spaces.
             let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^0-9A-Za-z_ ]', ' ', 'g' )
         else
-            let accept_chars = ','.&iskeyword.','
-            " Remove all character ranges
-            " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', ',', 'g')
-            let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', '', 'g')
-            " Remove all numeric specifications
-            " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\d\{-},', ',', 'g')
-            let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=\d\{-},', '', 'g')
-            " Remove all commas
-            let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',', '', 'g')
-            " Escape special regex characters
-            let accept_chars = escape(accept_chars, '\\/.*$^~[]' )
-            " Remove all characters that are not acceptable
-            let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^0-9A-Za-z_ '.accept_chars.']', ' ', 'g' )
+            if g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword_numeric == 1
+                " iskeyword can contain value like this
+                " 38,42,43,45,47-58,60-62,64-90,97-122,_,+,-,*,/,%,<,=,>,:,$,?,!,@-@,94
+                " Numeric values convert to their ASCII equivalent using the
+                " nr2char() function.
+                "     &       38
+                "     *       42
+                "     +       43
+                "     -       45
+                "     ^       94
+                " Iterate through all numeric specifications and convert those
+                " to their ascii equivalent ensuring the character is printable.
+                " If so, add it to the list.
+                let accepted_chars = ''
+                for item in split(&iskeyword, ',')
+                    if item =~ '-'
+                        " This is a character range (ie 47-58),
+                        " cycle through each character within the range
+                        let [b:start, b:end] = split(item, '-')
+                        for range_item in range( b:start, b:end )
+                            if range_item <= 127 || g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte == 0
+                                if nr2char(range_item) =~ '\p'
+                                    let accepted_chars = accepted_chars . nr2char(range_item)
+                                endif
+                            endif
+                        endfor
+                    elseif item =~ '^\d\+$'
+                        " Only numeric, translate to a character
+                        if item < 127 || g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte == 0
+                            if nr2char(item) =~ '\p'
+                                let accepted_chars = accepted_chars . nr2char(item)
+                            endif
+                        endif
+                    else
+                        if char2nr(item) < 127 || g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte == 0
+                            if item =~ '\p'
+                                let accepted_chars = accepted_chars . item
+                            endif
+                        endif
+                    endif
+                endfor
+                " Escape special regex characters
+                " Looks like the wrong chars are escaped.  In a collection,
+                "      :h /[]
+                "      only `]', `\', `-' and `^' are special:
+                " let accepted_chars = escape(accepted_chars, '\\/.*$^~[]' )
+                let accepted_chars = escape(accepted_chars, ']\-^' )
+                " Remove all characters that are not acceptable
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^A-Za-z'.accepted_chars.']', ' ', 'g' )
+            else
+                let accept_chars = ','.&iskeyword.','
+                " Remove all character ranges
+                " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', ',', 'g')
+                let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', '', 'g')
+                " Remove all numeric specifications
+                " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\d\{-},', ',', 'g')
+                let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=\d\{-},', '', 'g')
+                " Remove all commas
+                let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',', '', 'g')
+                " Escape special regex characters
+                " Looks like the wrong chars are escaped.  In a collection,
+                "      :h /[]
+                "      only `]', `\', `-' and `^' are special:
+                " let accept_chars = escape(accept_chars, '\\/.*$^~[]' )
+                let accept_chars = escape(accept_chars, ']\-^' )
+                " Remove all characters that are not acceptable
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^0-9A-Za-z_'.accept_chars.']', ' ', 'g' )
+            endif
         endif
 
         if b:omni_syntax_minimum_length > 0
@@ -471,3 +562,27 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )
 
     return syn_list
 endfunction
+
+function! OmniSyntaxShowChars(spec)
+  let result = []
+  for item in split(a:spec, ',')
+    if len(item) > 1
+      if item == '@-@'
+        call add(result, char2nr(item))
+      else
+        call extend(result, call('range', split(item, '-')))
+      endif
+    else
+      if item == '@'  " assume this is [A-Za-z]
+        for [c1, c2] in [['A', 'Z'], ['a', 'z']]
+          call extend(result, range(char2nr(c1), char2nr(c2)))
+        endfor
+      else
+        call add(result, char2nr(item))
+      endif
+    endif
+  endfor
+  return join(map(result, 'nr2char(v:val)'), ', ')
+endfunction
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/autoload/tohtml.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim autoload file for the tohtml plugin.
 " Maintainer: Ben Fritz <fritzophrenic@gmail.com>
-" Last Change: 2011 Apr 05
+" Last Change: 2012 Jun 30
 "
 " Additional contributors:
 "
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
 
 " this file uses line continuations
 let s:cpo_sav = &cpo
-set cpo-=C
+set cpo&vim
 
 " Automatically find charsets from all encodings supported natively by Vim. With
 " the 8bit- and 2byte- prefixes, Vim can actually support more encodings than
@@ -391,12 +391,25 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
   call add(html, '<meta name="plugin-version" content="'.g:loaded_2html_plugin.'"'.tag_close)
   call add(html, '<meta name="settings" content="'.
 	\ join(filter(keys(s:settings),'s:settings[v:val]'),',').
+	\ ',prevent_copy='.s:settings.prevent_copy.
 	\ '"'.tag_close)
+  call add(html, '<meta name="colorscheme" content="'.
+	\ (exists('g:colors_name')
+	\ ? g:colors_name
+	\ : 'none'). '"'.tag_close)
 
   call add(html, '</head>')
   let body_line_num = len(html)
-  call add(html, '<body>')
-  call add(html, '<table border="1" width="100%">')
+  if !empty(s:settings.prevent_copy)
+    call add(html, "<body onload='FixCharWidth();'>")
+    call add(html, "<!-- hidden divs used by javascript to get the width of a char -->")
+    call add(html, "<div id='oneCharWidth'>0</div>")
+    call add(html, "<div id='oneInputWidth'><input size='1' value='0'".tag_close."</div>")
+    call add(html, "<div id='oneEmWidth' style='width: 1em;'></div>")
+  else
+    call add(html, '<body>')
+  endif
+  call add(html, "<table border='1' width='100%' id='vimCodeElement'>")
 
   call add(html, '<tr>')
   for buf in a:win_list
@@ -454,16 +467,19 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
       let insert_index = diff_style_start
     endif
 
-    " Delete those parts that are not needed so
-    " we can include the rest into the resulting table
-    1,/^<body/d_
+    " Delete those parts that are not needed so we can include the rest into the
+    " resulting table.
+    1,/^<body.*\%(\n<!--.*-->\_s\+.*id='oneCharWidth'.*\_s\+.*id='oneInputWidth'.*\_s\+.*id='oneEmWidth'\)\?\zs/d_
     $
     ?</body>?,$d_
     let temp = getline(1,'$')
+    " clean out id on the main content container because we already set it on
+    " the table
+    let temp[0] = substitute(temp[0], " id='vimCodeElement'", "", "")
     " undo deletion of start and end part
     " so we can later save the file as valid html
     " TODO: restore using grabbed lines if undolevel is 1?
-    normal 2u
+    normal! 2u
     if s:settings.use_css
       call add(html, '<td valign="top"><div>')
     elseif s:settings.use_xhtml
@@ -520,12 +536,47 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
     1
     let style_start = search('^</head>')-1
 
+    " add required javascript in reverse order so we can just call append again
+    " and again without adjusting {{{
+
+    " insert script closing tag if any javascript is needed
+    if s:settings.dynamic_folds || !empty(s:settings.prevent_copy)
+      call append(style_start, [
+	    \ '',
+	    \ s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//]]>' : '-->',
+	    \ "</script>"
+	    \ ])
+    endif
+
+    " insert script which corrects the size of small input elements in
+    " prevent_copy mode. See 2html.vim for details on why this is needed and how
+    " it works.
+    if !empty(s:settings.prevent_copy)
+      call append(style_start, [
+	    \ '',
+	    \ '/* simulate a "ch" unit by asking the browser how big a zero character is */',
+	    \ 'function FixCharWidth() {',
+	    \ '  /* get the hidden element which gives the width of a single character */',
+	    \ '  var goodWidth = document.getElementById("oneCharWidth").clientWidth;',
+	    \ '  /* get all input elements, we''ll filter on class later */',
+	    \ '  var inputTags = document.getElementsByTagName("input");',
+	    \ '  var ratio = 5;',
+	    \ '  var inputWidth = document.getElementById("oneInputWidth").clientWidth;',
+	    \ '  var emWidth = document.getElementById("oneEmWidth").clientWidth;',
+	    \ '  if (inputWidth > goodWidth) {',
+	    \ '    while (ratio < 100*goodWidth/emWidth && ratio < 100) {',
+	    \ '    ratio += 5;',
+	    \ '  }',
+	    \ '  document.getElementById("vimCodeElement").className = "em"+ratio;',
+	    \ '  }',
+	    \ '}'
+	    \ ])
+    endif
+
     " Insert javascript to toggle matching folds open and closed in all windows,
-    " if dynamic folding is active. {{{
+    " if dynamic folding is active.
     if s:settings.dynamic_folds
       call append(style_start, [
-	    \  "<script type='text/javascript'>",
-	    \  s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//<![CDATA[' : "  <!--",
 	    \  "  function toggleFold(objID)",
 	    \  "  {",
 	    \  "    for (win_num = 1; win_num <= ".len(a:buf_list)."; win_num++)",
@@ -542,9 +593,14 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
 	    \  "      }",
 	    \  "    }",
 	    \  "  }",
-	    \  s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//]]>' : "  -->",
-	    \  "</script>"
 	    \ ])
+    endif
+
+    " insert script tag if any javascript is needed
+    if s:settings.dynamic_folds || s:settings.prevent_copy != ""
+      call append(style_start, [
+	    \ "<script type='text/javascript'>",
+	    \ s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//<![CDATA[' : "<!--"])
     endif "}}}
 
     " Insert styles from all the generated html documents and additional styles
@@ -609,9 +665,10 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
     call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings, 'ignore_conceal', 0 )
     call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings, 'ignore_folding', 0 )
     call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'dynamic_folds', 0 )
-    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'no_foldcolumn', 0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'no_foldcolumn', user_settings.ignore_folding)
     call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,   'hover_unfold', 0 )
     call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,         'no_pre', 0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,     'no_invalid', 0 )
     call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,   'whole_filler', 0 )
     call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,      'use_xhtml', 0 )
     " }}}
@@ -637,6 +694,8 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
     " dynamic folding implies css
     if user_settings.dynamic_folds
       let user_settings.use_css = 1
+    else
+      let user_settings.no_foldcolumn = 1 " won't do anything but for consistency and for the test suite
     endif
 
     " if we're not using CSS we cannot use a pre section because <font> tags
@@ -663,6 +722,7 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
     endif
     " }}}
 
+    " textual options
     if exists("g:html_use_encoding") "{{{
       " user specified the desired MIME charset, figure out proper
       " 'fileencoding' from it or warn the user if we cannot
@@ -705,6 +765,45 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
       endif
     endif "}}}
 
+    " Default to making nothing uncopyable, because we default to
+    " not-standards way of doing things, and also because Microsoft Word and
+    " others paste the <input> elements anyway.
+    "
+    " html_prevent_copy only has an effect when using CSS.
+    "
+    " All options:
+    "	  f - fold column
+    "	  n - line numbers (also within fold text)
+    "	  t - fold text
+    "	  d - diff filler
+    "	  c - concealed text (reserved future)
+    "	  l - listchars (reserved possible future)
+    "	  s - signs (reserved possible future)
+    "
+    " Normal text is always selectable.
+    let user_settings.prevent_copy = ""
+    if user_settings.use_css
+      if exists("g:html_prevent_copy")
+	if user_settings.dynamic_folds && !user_settings.no_foldcolumn && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 'f'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 'f'
+	endif
+	if user_settings.number_lines && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 'n'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 'n'
+	endif
+	if &diff && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 'd'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 'd'
+	endif
+	if !user_settings.ignore_folding && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 't'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 't'
+	endif
+      else
+	let user_settings.prevent_copy = ""
+      endif
+    endif
+    if empty(user_settings.prevent_copy)
+      let user_settings.no_invalid = 0
+    endif
+
     " TODO: font
 
     return user_settings

runtime/compiler/cs.vim

@@ -2,12 +2,14 @@
 " Compiler:	Microsoft Visual Studio C#
 " Maintainer:	Zhou YiChao (broken.zhou@gmail.com)
 " Previous Maintainer:	Joseph H. Yao (hyao@sina.com)
-" Last Change:	2011 Apr 21
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "cs"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat+=%f(%l\\,%v):\ %t%*[^:]:\ %m,
             \%tarning%*[^:]:\ %m
 
 CompilerSet makeprg=csc\ %
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/compiler/decada.vim

@@ -15,11 +15,11 @@
 "    Help Page: compiler-decada
 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-if (exists("current_compiler")	    &&
-   \ current_compiler == "decada")  ||
-   \ version < 700
+if (exists("current_compiler") && current_compiler == "decada") || version < 700
    finish
 endif
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 let current_compiler = "decada"
 
@@ -44,6 +44,9 @@ endif
 execute "CompilerSet makeprg="     . escape (g:decada.Make_Command, ' ')
 execute "CompilerSet errorformat=" . escape (g:decada.Error_Format, ' ')
 
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 finish " 1}}}
 
 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------

runtime/compiler/g95.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Compiler: G95
 " Maintainer: H Xu <xuhdev@gmail.com>
 " Version: 0.1.3
-" Last Change: 2011 Apr 01
+" Last Change: 2012 Apr 30
 " Homepage: http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=3492
 "           https://bitbucket.org/xuhdev/compiler-g95.vim
 " License: Same as Vim
@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ if exists('current_compiler')
     finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = 'g95'
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -21,3 +23,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
             \%-Z%trror:\ %m,
             \%-Z%tarning\ (%n):\ %m,
             \%-C%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/compiler/gfortran.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Compiler: GNU Fortran Compiler
 " Maintainer: H Xu <xuhdev@gmail.com>
 " Version: 0.1.3
-" Last Change: 19 March 2011
+" Last Change: 2012 Apr 30
 " Homepage: http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=3496
 "           https://bitbucket.org/xuhdev/compiler-gfortran.vim
 " License: Same as Vim
@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ if exists('current_compiler')
     finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = 'gfortran'
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -20,3 +22,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
             \%-Z%trror:\ %m,
             \%-Z%tarning:\ %m,
             \%-C%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/compiler/gnat.vim

@@ -17,11 +17,11 @@
 "    Help Page: compiler-gnat
 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-if (exists("current_compiler")	    &&
-   \ current_compiler == "gnat")    ||
-   \ version < 700
+if (exists("current_compiler")&& current_compiler == "gnat") || version < 700
    finish
 endif
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 let current_compiler = "gnat"
 
@@ -62,6 +62,9 @@ endif
 execute "CompilerSet makeprg="     . escape (g:gnat.Get_Command('Make'), ' ')
 execute "CompilerSet errorformat=" . escape (g:gnat.Error_Format, ' ')
 
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 finish " 1}}}
 
 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------

runtime/compiler/hp_acc.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Compiler:	HP aCC
 " Maintainer:	Matthias Ulrich <matthias-ulrich@web.de>
 " URL:          http://www.subhome.de/vim/hp_acc.vim
-" Last Change:	2005 Nov 19
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30
 "
 "  aCC --version says: "HP ANSI C++ B3910B A.03.13"
 "  This compiler has been tested on:
@@ -19,6 +19,8 @@ if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "hp_acc"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -30,4 +32,7 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%A%trror\ %n\:\ \"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l\ \#\ %m,
          \%Z\ \ \ \ %p^%.%#,
          \%-C%.%#
 
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 " vim:ts=8:sw=4:cindent

runtime/compiler/ifort.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Compiler: Intel Fortran Compiler
 " Maintainer: H Xu <xuhdev@gmail.com>
 " Version: 0.1.1
-" Last Change: 19 March 2011
+" Last Change: 2012 Apr 30
 " Homepage: http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=3497
 "           https://bitbucket.org/xuhdev/compiler-ifort.vim
 " License: Same as Vim
@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ if exists('current_compiler')
     finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = 'ifort'
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -20,3 +22,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
             \%A%f(%l):\ %tarning\ \#%n:\ %m,
             \%-Z%p^,
             \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/compiler/intel.vim

@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:     Intel C++ 7.1
 " Maintainer:   David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:  2004 May 16
+" Last Change:  2012 Apr 30
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "intel"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%E%f(%l):\ error:\ %m,
 		    \%-Z\ \ %p^,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/compiler/irix5_c.vim

@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 5.3 cc
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "irix5_c"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=\%Ecfe:\ Error:\ %f\\,\ line\ %l:\ %m,
 		     \%-Z\ %p^,
 		     \-G\\s%#,
 		     \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/compiler/irix5_cpp.vim

@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 5.3 CC or NCC
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "irix5_cpp"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%E\"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l:\ error(%n):\ ,
 		      \%-Z\ \ %p%^,
 		      \%+C\ %\\{10}%.%#,
 		      \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/compiler/mcs.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:    Mono C# Compiler
 " Maintainer:  Jarek Sobiecki <harijari@go2.pl>
-" Latest Revision: 2006-06-18
+" Last Updated By: Peter Collingbourne
+" Latest Revision: 2012 Jul 19
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
@@ -12,13 +13,18 @@ let s:cpo_save = &cpo
 set cpo-=C
 
 setlocal errorformat=
+         \%D%.%#Project\ \"%f/%[%^/\"]%#\"%.%#,
+         \%X%.%#Done\ building\ project\ \"%f/%[%^/\"]%#\"%.%#,
+         \%-G%\\s%.%#,
+         \%E%f(%l):\ error\ CS%n:%m,
+         \%W%f(%l):\ warning\ CS%n:%m,
          \%E%f(%l\\,%c):\ error\ CS%n:%m,
          \%W%f(%l\\,%c):\ warning\ CS%n:%m,
          \%E%>syntax\ error\\,%m,%Z%f(%l\\,%c):\ error\ CS%n:%m,
          \%D%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Entering\ directory\ `%f',
          \%X%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Leaving\ directory\ `%f',
          \%DMaking\ %*\\a\ in\ %f,
-         \%G-%.%#
+         \%-G%.%#
 
 let &cpo = s:cpo_save
 unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/compiler/mips_c.vim

@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 6.5 MIPS C (cc)
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "mips_c"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%Ecc\-%n\ %.%#:\ ERROR\ File\ =\ %f\%\\,\ Line\ =\ %l,
 		    \%-Z\ \ %p^,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/compiler/mipspro_c89.vim

@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 6.5 MIPSPro C (c89)
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "mipspro_c89"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -20,3 +22,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%Ecc\-%n\ %.%#:\ ERROR\ File\ =\ %f\%\\,\ Line\ =\ %l,
 		    \%+C\ \ %m,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/compiler/mipspro_cpp.vim

@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 6.5 MIPSPro C++ (CC)
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "mipspro_cpp"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%Ecc\-%n\ %.%#:\ ERROR\ File\ =\ %f\%\\,\ Line\ =\ %l,
 		    \%-Z\ \ %p^,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/compiler/tex.vim

@@ -1,11 +1,13 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:     TeX
 " Maintainer:   Artem Chuprina <ran@ran.pp.ru>
-" Last Change:  2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:  2012 Apr 30
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
 	finish
 endif
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
   command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -30,9 +32,6 @@ else
 	let current_compiler = 'make'
 endif
 
-let s:cpo_save = &cpo
-set cpo-=C
-
 " Value errorformat are taken from vim help, see :help errorformat-LaTeX, with
 " addition from Srinath Avadhanula <srinath@fastmail.fm>
 CompilerSet errorformat=%E!\ LaTeX\ %trror:\ %m,
@@ -64,5 +63,5 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%E!\ LaTeX\ %trror:\ %m,
 	\%+Q%*[^()])%r,
 	\%+Q[%\\d%*[^()])%r
 
-let &cpo = s:cpo_save
-unlet s:cpo_save
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Feb 22
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Sep 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -263,8 +263,10 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 	Startup and exit
 |VimEnter|		after doing all the startup stuff
 |GUIEnter|		after starting the GUI successfully
+|GUIFailed|		after starting the GUI failed
 |TermResponse|		after the terminal response to |t_RV| is received
 
+|QuitPre|			when using `:quit`, before deciding whether to quit
 |VimLeavePre|		before exiting Vim, before writing the viminfo file
 |VimLeave|		before exiting Vim, after writing the viminfo file
 
@@ -312,6 +314,7 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |SessionLoadPost|	after loading a session file
 
 |MenuPopup|		just before showing the popup menu
+|CompleteDone|		after Insert mode completion is done
 
 |User|			to be used in combination with ":doautocmd"
 
@@ -385,6 +388,10 @@ BufRead or BufReadPost		When starting to edit a new buffer, after
 				This does NOT work for ":r file".  Not used
 				when the file doesn't exist.  Also used after
 				successfully recovering a file.
+				Also triggered for the filetypedetect group
+				when executing ":filetype detect" and when
+				writing an unnamed buffer in a way that the
+				buffer gets a name.
 							*BufReadCmd*
 BufReadCmd			Before starting to edit a new buffer.  Should
 				read the file into the buffer. |Cmd-event|
@@ -474,6 +481,11 @@ CmdwinLeave			Before leaving the command-line window.
 							*ColorScheme*
 ColorScheme			After loading a color scheme. |:colorscheme|
 
+							*CompleteDone*
+CompleteDone			After Insert mode completion is done.  Either
+				when something was completed or abandoning
+				completion. |ins-completion|
+
 							*CursorHold*
 CursorHold			When the user doesn't press a key for the time
 				specified with 'updatetime'.  Not re-triggered
@@ -700,7 +712,9 @@ QuickFixCmdPre			Before a quickfix command is run (|:make|,
 				|:lmake|, |:grep|, |:lgrep|, |:grepadd|,
 				|:lgrepadd|, |:vimgrep|, |:lvimgrep|,
 				|:vimgrepadd|, |:lvimgrepadd|, |:cscope|,
-				|:helpgrep|, |:lhelpgrep|).
+				|:cfile|, |:cgetfile|, |:caddfile|, |:lfile|,
+				|:lgetfile|, |:laddfile|, |:helpgrep|,
+				|:lhelpgrep|).
 				The pattern is matched against the command
 				being run.  When |:grep| is used but 'grepprg'
 				is set to "internal" it still matches "grep".
@@ -711,7 +725,16 @@ QuickFixCmdPre			Before a quickfix command is run (|:make|,
 							*QuickFixCmdPost*
 QuickFixCmdPost			Like QuickFixCmdPre, but after a quickfix
 				command is run, before jumping to the first
-				location.  See |QuickFixCmdPost-example|.
+				location. For |:cfile| and |:lfile| commands
+				it is run after error file is read and before
+				moving to the first error. 
+				See |QuickFixCmdPost-example|.
+							*QuitPre*
+QuitPre				When using `:quit`, before deciding whether it
+				closes the current window or quits Vim.  Can
+				be used to close any non-essential window if
+				the current window is the last ordinary
+				window.
 							*RemoteReply*
 RemoteReply			When a reply from a Vim that functions as
 				server was received |server2client()|.  The

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 04
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -80,8 +80,8 @@ For inserting text see |insert.txt|.
 			(default: current line |cmdline-ranges|) [into
 			register x].
 
-These commands delete text.  You can repeat them with the "." command
-(except ":d") and undo them.  Use Visual mode to delete blocks of text.  See
+These commands delete text.  You can repeat them with the `.` command
+(except `:d`) and undo them.  Use Visual mode to delete blocks of text.  See
 |registers| for an explanation of registers.
 
 An exception for the d{motion} command: If the motion is not linewise, the
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ gJ			Join [count] lines, with a minimum of two lines.
 			See |ex-flags| for [flags].
 
 These commands delete the <EOL> between lines.  This has the effect of joining
-multiple lines into one line.  You can repeat these commands (except ":j") and
+multiple lines into one line.  You can repeat these commands (except `:j`) and
 undo them.
 
 These commands, except "gJ", insert one space in place of the <EOL> unless
@@ -260,6 +260,12 @@ r{char}			Replace the character under the cursor with {char}.
 			<CR>.  CTRL-V <NL> replaces with a <Nul>.
 			{Vi: CTRL-V <CR> still replaces with a line break,
 			cannot replace something with a <CR>}
+
+			If {char} is CTRL-E or CTRL-Y the character from the
+			line below or above is used, just like with |i_CTRL-E|
+			and |i_CTRL-Y|.  This also works with a count, thus
+			`10r<C-E>` copies 10 characters from the line below.
+
 			If you give a [count], Vim replaces [count] characters
 			with [count] {char}s.  When {char} is a <CR> or <NL>,
 			however, Vim inserts only one <CR>: "5r<CR>" replaces
@@ -465,9 +471,9 @@ much as possible to make the indent.  You can use ">><<" to replace an indent
 made out of spaces with the same indent made out of <Tab>s (and a few spaces
 if necessary).  If the 'expandtab' option is on, Vim uses only spaces.  Then
 you can use ">><<" to replace <Tab>s in the indent by spaces (or use
-":retab!").
+`:retab!`).
 
-To move a line several 'shiftwidth's, use Visual mode or the ":" commands.
+To move a line several 'shiftwidth's, use Visual mode or the `:` commands.
 For example: >
 	Vjj4>		move three lines 4 indents to the right
 	:<<<		move current line 3 indents to the left
@@ -487,7 +493,7 @@ Examples of filters are "sort", which sorts lines alphabetically, and
 works like a filter; not all versions do).  The 'shell' option specifies the
 shell Vim uses to execute the filter command (See also the 'shelltype'
 option).  You can repeat filter commands with ".".  Vim does not recognize a
-comment (starting with '"') after the ":!" command.
+comment (starting with '"') after the `:!` command.
 
 							*!*
 !{motion}{filter}	Filter {motion} text lines through the external
@@ -574,34 +580,37 @@ For other systems the tmpnam() library function is used.
 			Repeat last :substitute with same search pattern and
 			substitute string, but without the same flags.  You
 			may add [flags], see |:s_flags|.
-			Note that after ":substitute" the '&' flag can't be
+			Note that after `:substitute` the '&' flag can't be
 			used, it's recognized as a pattern separator.
-			The space between ":substitute" and the 'c', 'g' and
+			The space between `:substitute` and the 'c', 'g' and
 			'r' flags isn't required, but in scripts it's a good
 			idea to keep it to avoid confusion.
 
 :[range]~[&][flags] [count]					*:~*
 			Repeat last substitute with same substitute string
 			but with last used search pattern.  This is like
-			":&r".  See |:s_flags| for [flags].
+			`:&r`.  See |:s_flags| for [flags].
 
 								*&*
-&			Synonym for ":s" (repeat last substitute).  Note
+&			Synonym for `:s` (repeat last substitute).  Note
 			that the flags are not remembered, thus it might
-			actually work differently.  You can use ":&&" to keep
+			actually work differently.  You can use `:&&` to keep
 			the flags.
 
 								*g&*
-g&			Synonym for ":%s//~/&" (repeat last substitute on all
-			lines with the same flags).
+g&			Synonym for `:%s//~/&` (repeat last substitute with
+			last search pattern on all lines with the same flags).
+			For exaple, when you first do a substitution with
+			`:s/pattern/repl/flags` and then `/search` for
+			something else, `g&` will do `:%s/search/repl/flags`.
 			Mnemonic: global substitute. {not in Vi}
 
 						*:snomagic* *:sno*
-:[range]sno[magic] ...	Same as ":substitute", but always use 'nomagic'.
+:[range]sno[magic] ...	Same as `:substitute`, but always use 'nomagic'.
 			{not in Vi}
 
 						*:smagic* *:sm*
-:[range]sm[agic] ...	Same as ":substitute", but always use 'magic'.
+:[range]sm[agic] ...	Same as `:substitute`, but always use 'magic'.
 			{not in Vi}
 
 							*:s_flags*
@@ -611,7 +620,7 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 	command.  Examples: >
 		:&&
 		:s/this/that/&
-<	Note that ":s" and ":&" don't keep the flags.
+<	Note that `:s` and `:&` don't keep the flags.
 	{not in Vi}
 
 [c]	Confirm each substitution.  Vim highlights the matching string (with
@@ -660,6 +669,8 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 [n]	Report the number of matches, do not actually substitute.  The [c]
 	flag is ignored.  The matches are reported as if 'report' is zero.
 	Useful to |count-items|.
+	If \= |sub-replace-expression| is used, the expression will be
+	evaluated in the |sandbox| at every match.
 
 [p]	Print the line containing the last substitute.
 
@@ -667,14 +678,14 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 
 [l]	Like [p] but print the text like |:list|.
 
-[r]	Only useful in combination with ":&" or ":s" without arguments.  ":&r"
-	works the same way as ":~":  When the search pattern is empty, use the
+[r]	Only useful in combination with `:&` or `:s` without arguments.  `:&r`
+	works the same way as `:~`:  When the search pattern is empty, use the
 	previously used search pattern instead of the search pattern from the
-	last substitute or ":global".  If the last command that did a search
-	was a substitute or ":global", there is no effect.  If the last
+	last substitute or `:global`.  If the last command that did a search
+	was a substitute or `:global`, there is no effect.  If the last
 	command was a search command such as "/", use the pattern from that
 	command.
-	For ":s" with an argument this already happens: >
+	For `:s` with an argument this already happens: >
 		:s/blue/red/
 		/green
 		:s//red/   or  :~   or  :&r
@@ -691,9 +702,9 @@ reason is that the flags can only be found by skipping the pattern, and in
 order to skip the pattern the "magicness" must be known.  Catch 22!
 
 If the {pattern} for the substitute command is empty, the command uses the
-pattern from the last substitute or ":global" command.  If there is none, but
+pattern from the last substitute or `:global` command.  If there is none, but
 there is a previous search pattern, that one is used.  With the [r] flag, the
-command uses the pattern from the last substitute, ":global", or search
+command uses the pattern from the last substitute, `:global`, or search
 command.
 
 If the {string} is omitted the substitute is done as if it's empty.  Thus the
@@ -848,7 +859,7 @@ This replaces each 'E' character with a euro sign.  Read more in |<Char->|.
 
 
 4.4 Changing tabs					*change-tabs*
-							*:ret* *:retab*
+							*:ret* *:retab* *:retab!*
 :[range]ret[ab][!] [new_tabstop]
 			Replace all sequences of white-space containing a
 			<Tab> with new strings of white-space using the new
@@ -867,7 +878,7 @@ This replaces each 'E' character with a euro sign.  Read more in |<Char->|.
 			Careful: This command modifies any <Tab> characters
 			inside of strings in a C program.  Use "\t" to avoid
 			this (that's a good habit anyway).
-			":retab!" may also change a sequence of spaces by
+			`:retab!` may also change a sequence of spaces by
 			<Tab> characters, which can mess up a printf().
 			{not in Vi}
 			Not available when |+ex_extra| feature was disabled at
@@ -977,8 +988,12 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 			current line).  This always works |linewise|, thus
 			this command can be used to put a yanked block as new
 			lines.
-			The cursor is left on the first non-blank in the last
-			new line.
+			If no register is specified, it depends on the 'cb'
+			option: If 'cb' contains "unnamedplus", paste from the
+			+ register |quoteplus|.  Otherwise, if 'cb' contains
+			"unnamed", paste from the * register |quotestar|.
+			Otherwise, paste from the unnamed register
+			|quote_quote|.
 			The register can also be '=' followed by an optional
 			expression.  The expression continues until the end of
 			the command.  You need to escape the '|' and '"'
@@ -1183,7 +1198,7 @@ nothing is returned.  {not in Vi}
 
 9. Last search pattern register	"/			*quote_/* *quote/*
 Contains the most recent search-pattern.  This is used for "n" and 'hlsearch'.
-It is writable with ":let", you can change it to have 'hlsearch' highlight
+It is writable with `:let`, you can change it to have 'hlsearch' highlight
 other matches without actually searching.  You can't yank or delete into this
 register.  The search direction is available in |v:searchforward|.
 Note that the valued is restored when returning from a function
@@ -1191,12 +1206,12 @@ Note that the valued is restored when returning from a function
 {not in Vi}
 
 							*@/*
-You can write to a register with a ":let" command |:let-@|.  Example: >
+You can write to a register with a `:let` command |:let-@|.  Example: >
 	:let @/ = "the"
 
 If you use a put command without specifying a register, Vim uses the register
 that was last filled (this is also the contents of the unnamed register).  If
-you are confused, use the ":dis" command to find out what Vim will put (this
+you are confused, use the `:dis` command to find out what Vim will put (this
 command displays all named and numbered registers; the unnamed register is
 labelled '"').
 
@@ -1492,6 +1507,7 @@ n	When formatting text, recognize numbered lists.  This actually uses
 			first line of a paragraph
 		second line of the same paragraph
 		third line.
+<	This also works inside comments, ignoring the comment leader.
 v	Vi-compatible auto-wrapping in insert mode: Only break a line at a
 	blank that you have entered during the current insert command.  (Note:
 	this is not 100% Vi compatible.  Vi has some "unexpected features" or
@@ -1512,6 +1528,12 @@ B	When joining lines, don't insert a space between two multi-byte
 	characters.  Overruled by the 'M' flag.
 1	Don't break a line after a one-letter word.  It's broken before it
 	instead (if possible).
+j	Where it makes sense, remove a comment leader when joining lines.  For
+	example, joining:
+		int i;   // the index ~
+		         // in the list ~
+	Becomes:
+		int i;   // the index in the list ~
 
 
 With 't' and 'c' you can specify when Vim performs auto-wrapping:
@@ -1555,7 +1577,7 @@ Some examples:
 	:set fo=tcrq
 <
 
-Automatic formatting					*auto-format*
+Automatic formatting				*auto-format* *autoformat*
 
 When the 'a' flag is present in 'formatoptions' text is formatted
 automatically when inserting text or deleting text.  This works nice for
@@ -1664,7 +1686,7 @@ found here: |sort()|.
 			last search pattern is used.  This allows trying out
 			a pattern first.
 
-Note that using ":sort" with ":global" doesn't sort the matching lines, it's
+Note that using `:sort` with `:global` doesn't sort the matching lines, it's
 quite useless.
 
 The details about sorting depend on the library function used.  There is no

runtime/doc/cmdline.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Feb 05
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 11
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ CTRL-\ e {expr}						*c_CTRL-\_e*
 			   :return cmd
 			:endfunc
 <		This doesn't work recursively, thus not when already editing
-		an expression.
+		an expression.  But it is possible to use in a mapping.
 
 							*c_CTRL-Y*
 CTRL-Y		When there is a modeless selection, copy the selection into
@@ -330,12 +330,12 @@ terminals)
 
 :his[tory] [{name}] [{first}][, [{last}]]
 		List the contents of history {name} which can be:
-		c[md]	 or :	command-line history
-		s[earch] or /	search string history
-		e[xpr]	 or =	expression register history
-		i[nput]	 or @	input line history
-		d[ebug]	 or >	debug command history
-		a[ll]		all of the above
+		c[md]	 or :		command-line history
+		s[earch] or / or ?	search string history
+		e[xpr]	 or =		expression register history
+		i[nput]	 or @		input line history
+		d[ebug]	 or >		debug command history
+		a[ll]			all of the above
 		{not in Vi}
 
 		If the numbers {first} and/or {last} are given, the respective
@@ -826,10 +826,11 @@ These modifiers can be given, in this order:
 		the home directory.  If the name is a directory a path
 		separator is added at the end.  For a file name that does not
 		exist and does not have an absolute path the result is
-		unpredictable.
+		unpredictable.  On MS-Windows an 8.3 filename is expanded to
+		the long name.
 	:8	Converts the path to 8.3 short format (currently only on
-		win32).  Will act on as much of a path that is an existing
-		path.
+		MS-Windows).  Will act on as much of a path that is an
+		existing path.
 	:~	Reduce file name to be relative to the home directory, if
 		possible.  File name is unmodified if it is not below the home
 		directory.

runtime/doc/diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Apr 14
+*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Sep 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -86,16 +86,16 @@ diff mode.  You could use a construct like this: >
 While already in Vim you can start diff mode in three ways.
 
 							*E98*
-:diffsplit {filename}					*:diffs* *:diffsplit*
+:diffs[plit] {filename}					*:diffs* *:diffsplit*
 		Open a new window on the file {filename}.  The options are set
 		as for "vimdiff" for the current and the newly opened window.
 		Also see 'diffexpr'.
 
 							*:difft* *:diffthis*
-:diffthis	Make the current window part of the diff windows.  This sets
+:difft[his]	Make the current window part of the diff windows.  This sets
 		the options like for "vimdiff".
 
-:diffpatch {patchfile}				 *E816* *:diffp* *:diffpatch*
+:diffp[atch] {patchfile}				 *E816* *:diffp* *:diffpatch*
 		Use the current buffer, patch it with the diff found in
 		{patchfile} and open a buffer on the result.  The options are
 		set as for "vimdiff".
@@ -123,9 +123,9 @@ Since the option values are remembered with the buffer, you can edit another
 file for a moment and come back to the same file and be in diff mode again.
 
 							*:diffo* *:diffoff*
-:diffoff	Switch off diff mode for the current window.
+:diffo[ff]	Switch off diff mode for the current window.
 
-:diffoff!	Switch off diff mode for the current window and in all windows
+:diffo[ff]!	Switch off diff mode for the current window and in all windows
 		in the current tab page where 'diff' is set.
 
 The ":diffoff" command resets the relevant options to their default value.
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ buffer.  If you don't want a buffer to remain used for the diff do ":set
 nodiff" before hiding it.
 
 							*:diffu* *:diffupdate*
-:diffu[pdate]			Update the diff highlighting and folds.
+:diffu[pdate][!]		Update the diff highlighting and folds.
 
 Vim attempts to keep the differences updated when you make changes to the
 text.  This mostly takes care of inserted and deleted lines.  Changes within a
@@ -187,6 +187,9 @@ To force the differences to be updated use: >
 
 	:diffupdate
 
+If the ! is included Vim will check if the file was changed externally and
+needs to be reloaded.  It will prompt for each changed file, like `:checktime`
+was used.
 
 Vim will show filler lines for lines that are missing in one window but are
 present in another.  These lines were inserted in another file or deleted in
@@ -330,7 +333,7 @@ diff.  This example explains the format that Vim expects: >
 
 The "1a2" item appends the line "bbb".
 The "4d4" item deletes the line "111".
-The '7c7" item replaces the line "GGG" with "ggg".
+The "7c7" item replaces the line "GGG" with "ggg".
 
 When 'diffexpr' is not empty, Vim evaluates it to obtain a diff file in the
 format mentioned.  These variables are set to the file names used:

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Feb 26
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -377,8 +377,9 @@ command that accepts more than one file name (like ":next file1 file2")
 embedded spaces must be escaped with a backslash.
 
 						*wildcard* *wildcards*
-Wildcards in {file} are expanded.  Which wildcards are supported depends on
-the system.  These are the common ones:
+Wildcards in {file} are expanded, but as with file completion, 'wildignore'
+and 'suffixes' apply.  Which wildcards are supported depends on the system.
+These are the common ones:
 	?	matches one character
 	*	matches anything, including nothing
 	**	matches anything, including nothing, recurses into directories
@@ -392,7 +393,7 @@ is to use "path\[[]abc]".  Then the file "path[abc]" literally.
 					*starstar-wildcard*
 Expanding "**" is possible on Unix, Win32, Mac OS/X and a few other systems.
 This allows searching a directory tree.  This goes up to 100 directories deep.
-Note there are some commands where this works slightly different, see
+Note there are some commands where this works slightly differently, see
 |file-searching|.
 Example: >
 	:n **/*.txt
@@ -422,9 +423,11 @@ You can have the backticks expanded as a Vim expression, instead of an
 external command, by using the syntax `={expr}` e.g.: >
 	:e `=tempname()`
 The expression can contain just about anything, thus this can also be used to
-avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.  Names are to be separated
-with line breaks.  When the result is a |List| then each item is used as a
-name.  Line breaks also separate names.
+avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.  However, 'wildignore'
+does apply like to other wildcars.
+If the expression returns a string then names are to be separated with line
+breaks.  When the result is a |List| then each item is used as a name.  Line
+breaks also separate names.
 
 							*++opt* *[++opt]*
 The [++opt] argument can be used to force the value of 'fileformat',
@@ -1066,6 +1069,7 @@ The names can be in upper- or lowercase.
 			If there are other tab pages and quitting the last
 			window in the current tab page the current tab page is
 			closed |tab-page|.
+			Triggers the |QuitPre| autocommand event.
 
 :conf[irm] q[uit]	Quit, but give prompt when changes have been made, or
 			the last file in the argument list has not been
@@ -1159,8 +1163,10 @@ MULTIPLE WINDOWS AND BUFFERS				*window-exit*
 							*:confirm* *:conf*
 :conf[irm] {command}	Execute {command}, and use a dialog when an
 			operation has to be confirmed.  Can be used on the
-			":q", ":qa" and ":w" commands (the latter to over-ride
-			a read-only setting).
+			|:q|, |:qa| and |:w| commands (the latter to override
+			a read-only setting), and any other command that can
+			fail in such a way, such as |:only|, |:buffer|,
+			|:bdelete|, etc.
 
 Examples: >
   :confirm w foo
@@ -1213,13 +1219,13 @@ For versions of Vim where browsing is not supported, the command is executed
 unmodified.
 
 							*browsefilter*
-For MS Windows, you can modify the filters that are used in the browse dialog.
-By setting the g:browsefilter or b:browsefilter variables, you can change the
-filters globally or locally to the buffer.  The variable is set to a string in
-the format "{filter label}\t{pattern};{pattern}\n" where {filter label} is the
-text that appears in the "Files of Type" comboBox, and {pattern} is the
-pattern which filters the filenames.  Several patterns can be given, separated
-by ';'.
+For MS Windows and GTK, you can modify the filters that are used in the browse
+dialog.  By setting the g:browsefilter or b:browsefilter variables, you can
+change the filters globally or locally to the buffer.  The variable is set to
+a string in the format "{filter label}\t{pattern};{pattern}\n" where {filter
+label} is the text that appears in the "Files of Type" comboBox, and {pattern}
+is the pattern which filters the filenames.  Several patterns can be given,
+separated by ';'.
 
 For Motif the same format is used, but only the very first pattern is actually
 used (Motif only offers one pattern, but you can edit it).
@@ -1227,7 +1233,7 @@ used (Motif only offers one pattern, but you can edit it).
 For example, to have only Vim files in the dialog, you could use the following
 command: >
 
-     let g:browsefilter="Vim Scripts\t*.vim\nVim Startup Files\t*vimrc\n"
+     let g:browsefilter = "Vim Scripts\t*.vim\nVim Startup Files\t*vimrc\n"
 
 You can override the filter setting on a per-buffer basis by setting the
 b:browsefilter variable.  You would most likely set b:browsefilter in a
@@ -1237,6 +1243,13 @@ difficult to start editing a file of a different type.  To overcome this, you
 may want to add "All Files\t*.*\n" as the final filter, so that the user can
 still access any desired file.
 
+To avoid setting browsefilter when Vim does not actually support it, you can
+use has("browsefilter"): >
+
+	if has("browsefilter")
+	   let g:browsefilter = "whatever"
+	endif
+
 ==============================================================================
 7. The current directory				*current-directory*
 
@@ -1639,6 +1652,6 @@ There are three different types of searching:
 
    Note that completion for ":find", ":sfind", and ":tabfind" commands do not
    currently work with 'path' items that contain a url or use the double star
-   (/usr/**2) or upward search (;) notations. >
+   with depth limiter (/usr/**2) or upward search (;) notations.
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/eval.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 28
+*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Dec 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -91,8 +91,8 @@ For boolean operators Numbers are used.  Zero is FALSE, non-zero is TRUE.
 Note that in the command >
 	:if "foo"
 "foo" is converted to 0, which means FALSE.  To test for a non-empty string,
-use strlen(): >
-	:if strlen("foo")
+use empty(): >
+	:if !empty("foo")
 <				*E745* *E728* *E703* *E729* *E730* *E731*
 List, Dictionary and Funcref types are not automatically converted.
 
@@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ of a |List| is different from the original |List|.  When using "is" without
 a |List| or a |Dictionary| it is equivalent to using "equal", using "isnot"
 equivalent to using "not equal".  Except that a different type means the
 values are different: "4 == '4'" is true, "4 is '4'" is false and "0 is []" is
-false and not a error. "is#"/"isnot#" and "is?"/"isnot?" can be used to match
+false and not an error. "is#"/"isnot#" and "is?"/"isnot?" can be used to match
 and ignore case.
 
 When comparing a String with a Number, the String is converted to a Number,
@@ -1544,15 +1544,18 @@ v:profiling	Normally zero.	Set to one after using ":profile start".
 
 					*v:progname* *progname-variable*
 v:progname	Contains the name (with path removed) with which Vim was
-		invoked.  Allows you to do special initialisations for "view",
-		"evim" etc., or any other name you might symlink to Vim.
+		invoked.  Allows you to do special initialisations for |view|,
+		|evim| etc., or any other name you might symlink to Vim.
 		Read-only.
 
 					*v:register* *register-variable*
 v:register	The name of the register in effect for the current normal mode
-		command.  If none is supplied it is the default register '"',
-		unless 'clipboard' contains "unnamed" or "unnamedplus", then
-		it is '*' or '+'.
+		command (regardless of whether that command actually used a
+		register).  Or for the currently executing normal mode mapping
+		(use this in custom commands that take a register).
+		If none is supplied it is the default register '"', unless
+		'clipboard' contains "unnamed" or "unnamedplus", then it is
+		'*' or '+'.
 		Also see |getreg()| and |setreg()|
 
 					*v:scrollstart* *scrollstart-variable*
@@ -1844,6 +1847,7 @@ lispindent( {lnum})		Number	Lisp indent for line {lnum}
 localtime()			Number	current time
 log( {expr})			Float	natural logarithm (base e) of {expr}
 log10( {expr})			Float	logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10
+luaeval( {expr}[, {expr}])	any	evaluate |Lua| expression
 map( {expr}, {string})		List/Dict  change each item in {expr} to {expr}
 maparg( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])
 				String or Dict
@@ -1876,6 +1880,8 @@ pow( {x}, {y})			Float	{x} to the power of {y}
 prevnonblank( {lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum}
 printf( {fmt}, {expr1}...)	String	format text
 pumvisible()			Number	whether popup menu is visible
+pyeval( {expr})			any	evaluate |Python| expression
+py3eval( {expr})		any	evaluate |python3| expression
 range( {expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])
 				List	items from {expr} to {max}
 readfile( {fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
@@ -1897,6 +1903,8 @@ repeat( {expr}, {count})	String	repeat {expr} {count} times
 resolve( {filename})		String	get filename a shortcut points to
 reverse( {list})		List	reverse {list} in-place
 round( {expr})			Float	round off {expr}
+screencol()			Number	current cursor column
+screenrow()			Number	current cursor row
 search( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])
 				Number	search for {pattern}
 searchdecl( {name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]])
@@ -1926,6 +1934,7 @@ setwinvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val})	set {varname} in window {nr} to {val}
 shellescape( {string} [, {special}])
 				String	escape {string} for use as shell
 					command argument
+shiftwidth()			Number	effective value of 'shiftwidth'
 simplify( {filename})		String	simplify filename as much as possible
 sin( {expr})			Float	sine of {expr}
 sinh( {expr})			Float	hyperbolic sine of {expr}
@@ -2313,7 +2322,7 @@ col({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column
 		position given with {expr}.  The accepted positions are:
 		    .	    the cursor position
 		    $	    the end of the cursor line (the result is the
-			    number of characters in the cursor line plus one)
+			    number of bytes in the cursor line plus one)
 		    'x	    position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
 			    returned)
 		Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line
@@ -2744,13 +2753,15 @@ exp({expr})						*exp()*
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
 
 
-expand({expr} [, {flag}])				*expand()*
+expand({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])				*expand()*
 		Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in {expr}.
-		The result is a String.  'wildignorecase' applies.
+		'wildignorecase' applies.
 
-		When there are several matches, they are separated by <NL>
-		characters.  [Note: in version 5.0 a space was used, which
-		caused problems when a file name contains a space]
+		If {list} is given and it is non-zero, a List will be returned.
+		Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several
+		matches, they are separated by <NL> characters.  [Note: in
+		version 5.0 a space was used, which caused problems when a
+		file name contains a space]
 
 		If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string.	A name
 		for a non-existing file is not included.
@@ -3227,7 +3238,8 @@ getcmdpos()						*getcmdpos()*
 		Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a
 		byte count.  The first column is 1.
 		Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
-		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|.  Returns 0 otherwise.
+		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
+		Returns 0 otherwise.
 		Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
 
 getcmdtype()						*getcmdtype()*
@@ -3240,8 +3252,8 @@ getcmdtype()						*getcmdtype()*
 		    @	|input()| command
 		    -	|:insert| or |:append| command
 		Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
-		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|.  Returns an empty string
-		otherwise.
+		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
+		Returns an empty string otherwise.
 		Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
 
 							*getcwd()*
@@ -3279,8 +3291,9 @@ getfperm({fname})					*getfperm()*
 		"rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner
 		of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users.
 		If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this
-		is replaced with the string "-".  Example: >
+		is replaced with the string "-".  Examples: >
 			:echo getfperm("/etc/passwd")
+			:echo getfperm(expand("~/.vimrc"))
 <		This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display
 		the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------".
 
@@ -3454,19 +3467,25 @@ getwinvar({winnr}, {varname})				*getwinvar()*
 			:let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list')
 			:echo "myvar = " . getwinvar(1, 'myvar')
 <
-glob({expr} [, {flag}])					*glob()*
+glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])				*glob()*
 		Expand the file wildcards in {expr}.  See |wildcards| for the
 		use of special characters.
-		The result is a String.
-		When there are several matches, they are separated by <NL>
-		characters.
-		Unless the optional {flag} argument is given and is non-zero,
+
+		Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is non-zero,
 		the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
 		one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
 		'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
 		'wildignorecase' always applies.
-		If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string.
-		A name for a non-existing file is not included.
+
+		When {list} is present and it is non-zero the result is a List
+		with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is,
+		you also get filenames containing newlines correctly.
+		Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several
+		matches, they are separated by <NL> characters.
+
+		If the expansion fails, the result is an empty String or List.
+		A name for a non-existing file is not included.  A symbolic
+		link is only included if it points to an existing file.
 
 		For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from
 		any external command.  Example: >
@@ -3552,6 +3571,9 @@ histadd({history}, {item})				*histadd()*
 			"search" or "/"   search pattern history
 			"expr"	 or "="   typed expression history
 			"input"  or "@"	  input line history
+			"debug"  or ">"   debug command history
+		The {history} string does not need to be the whole name, one
+		character is sufficient.
 		If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be
 		shifted to become the newest entry.
 		The result is a Number: 1 if the operation was successful,
@@ -3735,10 +3757,10 @@ inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]])		*inputdialog()*
 		Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs
 		are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text.
 		Example: >
-			:let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", &sw)
-			:if n != ""
-			:  let &sw = n
-			:endif
+		   :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", shiftwidth())
+		   :if n != ""
+		   :  let &sw = n
+		   :endif
 <		When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned.  When
 		omitted an empty string is returned.
 		Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button.  Hitting
@@ -3988,6 +4010,20 @@ log10({expr})						*log10()*
 <			-2.0
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
 		
+luaeval({expr}[, {expr}])					*luaeval()*
+		Evaluate Lua expression {expr} and return its result converted 
+		to Vim data structures. Second {expr} may hold additional 
+		argument accessible as _A inside first {expr}.
+		Strings are returned as they are.
+		Boolean objects are converted to numbers.
+		Numbers are converted to |Float| values if vim was compiled 
+		with |+float| and to numbers otherwise.
+		Dictionaries and lists obtained by vim.eval() are returned 
+		as-is.
+		Other objects are returned as zero without any errors.
+		See |lua-luaeval| for more details.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+lua| feature}
+
 map({expr}, {string})					*map()*
 		{expr} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|.
 		Replace each item in {expr} with the result of evaluating
@@ -4006,7 +4042,7 @@ map({expr}, {string})					*map()*
 
 		The operation is done in-place.  If you want a |List| or
 		|Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
-			:let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' & . "\t"')
+			:let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' v:val . "\t"')
 
 <		Returns {expr}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered.
 		When an error is encountered while evaluating {string} no
@@ -4312,7 +4348,7 @@ mode([expr])	Return a string that indicates the current mode.
 
 mzeval({expr})							*mzeval()*
 		Evaluate MzScheme expression {expr} and return its result
-		convert to Vim data structures.
+		converted to Vim data structures.
 		Numbers and strings are returned as they are.
 		Pairs (including lists and improper lists) and vectors are
 		returned as Vim |Lists|.
@@ -4417,6 +4453,7 @@ printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...)				*printf()*
 
 		Often used items are:
 		  %s	string
+		  %6S	string right-aligned in 6 display cells
 		  %6s	string right-aligned in 6 bytes
 		  %.9s	string truncated to 9 bytes
 		  %c	single byte
@@ -4531,6 +4568,10 @@ printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...)				*printf()*
 		s	The text of the String argument is used.  If a
 			precision is specified, no more bytes than the number
 			specified are used.
+		S	The text of the String argument is used.  If a
+			precision is specified, no more display cells than the
+			number specified are used.  Without the |+multi_byte|
+			feature works just like 's'.
 
 							*printf-f* *E807*
 		f	The Float argument is converted into a string of the 
@@ -4583,6 +4624,29 @@ pumvisible()						*pumvisible()*
 		This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the
 		popup menu.
 
+							*E860* *E861*
+py3eval({expr})						*py3eval()*
+		Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are 
+		copied though, unicode strings are additionally converted to 
+		'encoding').
+		Lists are represented as Vim |List| type.
+		Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with 
+		keys converted to strings.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+python3| feature}
+
+							*E858* *E859*
+pyeval({expr})						*pyeval()*
+		Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are 
+		copied though).
+		Lists are represented as Vim |List| type.
+		Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type, 
+		non-string keys result in error.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+python| feature}
+
 							*E726* *E727*
 range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])				*range()*
 		Returns a |List| with Numbers:
@@ -4810,15 +4874,34 @@ round({expr})							*round()*
 			echo round(-4.5)
 <			-5.0
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
-		
-		
+
+screencol()							*screencol()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the current screen column of
+		the cursor. The leftmost column has number 1.
+		This function is mainly used for testing.
+
+		Note: Always returns the current screen column, thus if used
+		in a command (e.g. ":echo screencol()") it will return the
+		column inside the command line, which is 1 when the command is
+		executed. To get the cursor position in the file use one of
+		the following mappings: >
+			nnoremap <expr> GG ":echom ".screencol()."\n"
+			nnoremap <silent> GG :echom screencol()<CR>
+<
+screenrow()							*screenrow()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the current screen row of the
+		cursor.  The top line has number one.
+		This function is mainly used for testing.
+
+		Note: Same restrictions as with |screencol()|.
+
 search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])	*search()*
 		Search for regexp pattern {pattern}.  The search starts at the
 		cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it).
 
+		When a match has been found its line number is returned.
 		If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't
 		move.  No error message is given.
-		When a match has been found its line number is returned.
 
 		{flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
 		'b'	search backward instead of forward
@@ -4847,7 +4930,7 @@ search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])	*search()*
 		A zero value is equal to not giving the argument.
 
 		When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when
-		more than this many milli seconds have passed.	Thus when
+		more than this many milliseconds have passed.	Thus when
 		{timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second.
 		The value must not be negative.  A zero value is like not
 		giving the argument.
@@ -5083,7 +5166,7 @@ setline({lnum}, {text})					*setline()*
 		will be set to the items in the list.  Example: >
 			:call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc'])
 <		This is equivalent to: >
-			:for [n, l] in [[5, 6, 7], ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc']]
+			:for [n, l] in [[5, 'aaa'], [6, 'bbb'], [7, 'ccc']]
 			:  call setline(n, l)
 			:endfor
 <		Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set.
@@ -5197,8 +5280,9 @@ setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
 
 		If {options} contains no register settings, then the default
 		is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL>.
-		Setting the '=' register is not possible.
-		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+		Setting the '=' register is not possible, but you can use >
+			:let @= = var_expr
+<		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
 
 		Examples: >
 			:call setreg(v:register, @*)
@@ -5274,6 +5358,23 @@ shellescape({string} [, {special}])			*shellescape()*
 		    :call system("chmod +w -- " . shellescape(expand("%")))
 
 
+shiftwidth()						*shiftwidth()*
+		Returns the effective value of 'shiftwidth'. This is the
+		'shiftwidth' value unless it is zero, in which case it is the
+		'tabstop' value.  To be backwards compatible in indent
+		plugins, use this: >
+			if exists('*shiftwidth')
+			  func s:sw()
+			    return shiftwidth()
+			  endfunc
+			else
+			  func s:sw()
+			    return &sw
+			  endfunc
+			endif
+<		And then use s:sw() instead of &sw.
+
+
 simplify({filename})					*simplify()*
 		Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing
 		the meaning.  Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on
@@ -5403,7 +5504,8 @@ split({expr} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]])			*split()*
 		empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an
 		item.
 		Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches,
-		removing the matched characters.
+		removing the matched characters. 'ignorecase' is not used
+		here, add \c to ignore case. |/\c|
 		When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the
 		{keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero.
 		Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one
@@ -5613,8 +5715,10 @@ substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})		*substitute()*
 		This works like the ":substitute" command (without any flags).
 		But the matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic'
 		option is set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts
-		portable).  'ignorecase' is still relevant.  'smartcase' is
-		not used.  See |string-match| for how {pat} is used.
+		portable).  'ignorecase' is still relevant, use |/\c| or |/\C|
+		if you want to ignore or match case and ignore 'ignorecase'.
+		'smartcase' is not used.  See |string-match| for how {pat} is
+		used.
 
 		A "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}.
 		Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning
@@ -5772,9 +5876,9 @@ tabpagebuflist([{arg}])					*tabpagebuflist()*
 		omitted the current tab page is used.
 		When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned.
 		To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: >
-			tablist = []
+			let buflist = []
 			for i in range(tabpagenr('$'))
-			   call extend(tablist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1))
+			   call extend(buflist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1))
 			endfor
 <		Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window.
 
@@ -5937,6 +6041,8 @@ undofile({name})					*undofile()*
 		the undo file exists.
 		{name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what
 		is used internally.
+		If {name} is empty undofile() returns an empty string, since a
+		buffer without a file name will not write an undo file.
 		Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|.
 		When compiled without the +persistent_undo option this always
 		returns an empty string.
@@ -5996,7 +6102,7 @@ virtcol({expr})						*virtcol()*
 		would be of unlimited width.  When there is a <Tab> at the
 		position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of
 		the <Tab>.  For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts'
-		set to 8, it returns 8.
+		set to 8, it returns 8. |conceal| is ignored.
 		For the byte position use |col()|.
 		For the use of {expr} see |col()|.
 		When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off], where
@@ -6077,8 +6183,9 @@ winline()	The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor
 winnr([{arg}])	The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
 		window.  The top window has number 1.
 		When the optional argument is "$", the number of the
-		last window is returned (the window count).
-		When the optional argument is "#", the number of the last
+		last window is returned (the window count). >
+			let window_count = winnr('$')
+<		When the optional argument is "#", the number of the last
 		accessed window is returned (where |CTRL-W_p| goes to).
 		If there is no previous window or it is in another tab page 0
 		is returned.
@@ -6190,6 +6297,7 @@ balloon_multiline	GUI supports multiline balloons.
 beos			BeOS version of Vim.
 browse			Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will
 			work.
+browsefilter		Compiled with support for |browsefilter|.
 builtin_terms		Compiled with some builtin terminals.
 byte_offset		Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline'
 cindent			Compiled with 'cindent' support.
@@ -6267,6 +6375,7 @@ mouse_gpm		Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse)
 mouse_netterm		Compiled with support for netterm mouse.
 mouse_pterm		Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse.
 mouse_sysmouse		Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse)
+mouse_sgr		Compiled with support for sgr mouse.
 mouse_urxvt		Compiled with support for urxvt mouse.
 mouse_xterm		Compiled with support for xterm mouse.
 mouseshape		Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'.
@@ -6447,6 +6556,8 @@ See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
 			is excluded, ":{range}call" will call the function for
 			each line in the range, with the cursor on the start
 			of each line.  See |function-range-example|.
+			The cursor is still moved to the first line of the
+			range, as is the case with all Ex commands.
 
 			When the [abort] argument is added, the function will
 			abort as soon as an error is detected.
@@ -6678,9 +6789,9 @@ Hint: If you distribute a bunch of scripts you can pack them together with the
 ==============================================================================
 6. Curly braces names					*curly-braces-names*
 
-Wherever you can use a variable, you can use a "curly braces name" variable.
-This is a regular variable name with one or more expressions wrapped in braces
-{} like this: >
+In most places where you can use a variable, you can use a "curly braces name"
+variable.  This is a regular variable name with one or more expressions
+wrapped in braces {} like this: >
 	my_{adjective}_variable
 
 When Vim encounters this, it evaluates the expression inside the braces, puts
@@ -6716,6 +6827,11 @@ Example: >
 
 This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)".
 
+This does NOT work: >
+  :let i = 3
+  :let @{i} = ''  " error
+  :echo @{i}      " error
+
 ==============================================================================
 7. Commands						*expression-commands*
 

runtime/doc/evim-fr.1

@@ -54,3 +54,4 @@ Voir le menu Aide/Remerciements ou ":help credits" dans
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a <20>t<EFBFBD> traduite David Blanchet.
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-26.
+Mise <20> jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pell<6C> <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>

runtime/doc/evim-fr.UTF-8.1

@@ -54,3 +54,4 @@ Voir le menu Aide/Remerciements ou ":help credits" dans
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a été traduite David Blanchet.
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-26.
+Mise à jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pellé <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>

runtime/doc/gui_w32.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jul 23
+*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -489,4 +489,16 @@ to:
 And add gvim to the list of applications.  This problem only appears to happen
 with the Intellimouse driver 2.2 and when "Universal Scrolling" is turned on.
 
+
+XPM support						*w32-xpm-support*
+
+Gvim can be build on MS-Windows with support for XPM files.  |+xpm_w32|
+See the Make_mvc.mak file for instructions, search for XPM.
+
+To try out if XPM support works do this: >
+	:help
+	:exe 'sign define vimxpm icon=' . $VIMRUNTIME . '\\vim16x16.xpm'
+	:exe 'sign place 1 line=1 name=vimxpm file=' . expand('%:p')
+<
+
  vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/hebrew.txt

@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Details
       This is also the keymap when 'keymap=hebrew' is set.  The advantage of
       'keymap' is that it works properly when using UTF8, e.g. it inserts the
       correct characters; 'hkmap' does not.  The 'keymap' keyboard can also
-      insert niqud and te`amim.  To see what those mappings are,look at the
+      insert niqud and te`amim.  To see what those mappings are, look at the
       keymap file 'hebrew.vim' etc.
 
 

runtime/doc/helphelp.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 14
+*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 28
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -194,11 +194,12 @@ command: >
 				*E154* *E150* *E151* *E152* *E153* *E670*
 :helpt[ags] [++t] {dir}
 			Generate the help tags file(s) for directory {dir}.
-			All "*.txt" and "*.??x" files in the directory are
-			scanned for a help tag definition in between stars.
-			The "*.??x" files are for translated docs, they
-			generate the "tags-??" file, see |help-translated|.
-			The generated tags files are sorted.
+			All "*.txt" and "*.??x" files in the directory and
+			sub-directories are scanned for a help tag definition
+			in between stars.  The "*.??x" files are for
+			translated docs, they generate the "tags-??" file, see
+			|help-translated|.  The generated tags files are
+			sorted.
 			When there are duplicates an error message is given.
 			An existing tags file is silently overwritten.
 			The optional "++t" argument forces adding the
@@ -218,11 +219,12 @@ files.  Vim will search for all help in "doc" directories in 'runtimepath'.
 This is only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang| feature.
 
 At this moment translations are available for:
-	Chinese - multiple authors
-	French  - translated by David Blanchet
-	Italian - translated by Antonio Colombo
-	Polish  - translated by Mikolaj Machowski
-	Russian - translated by Vassily Ragosin
+	Chinese  - multiple authors
+	French   - translated by David Blanchet
+	Italian  - translated by Antonio Colombo
+	Japanese - multiple authors
+	Polish   - translated by Mikolaj Machowski
+	Russian  - translated by Vassily Ragosin
 See the Vim website to find them: http://www.vim.org/translations.php
 
 A set of translated help files consists of these files:

runtime/doc/if_lua.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 22
+*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jun 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Luis Carvalho
@@ -8,8 +8,11 @@ The Lua Interface to Vim				*lua* *Lua*
 
 1. Commands			|lua-commands|
 2. The vim module		|lua-vim|
-3. Buffer userdata		|lua-buffer|
-4. Window userdata		|lua-window|
+3. List userdata		|lua-list|
+4. Dict userdata		|lua-dict|
+5. Buffer userdata		|lua-buffer|
+6. Window userdata		|lua-window|
+7. The luaeval function		|lua-luaeval|
 
 {Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
@@ -56,13 +59,14 @@ Example:
 <
 
 							*:luado*
-:[range]luado {body}	Execute Lua function "function (line) {body} end" for
-			each line in the [range], with the function argument
-			being set to the text of each line in turn, without a
-			trailing <EOL>. If the value returned by the function
-			is a string it becomes the text of the line in the
-			current turn. The default for [range] is the whole
-			file: "1,$".		      {not in Vi}
+:[range]luado {body}	Execute Lua function "function (line, linenr) {body}
+			end" for each line in the [range], with the function
+			argument being set to the text of each line in turn,
+			without a trailing <EOL>, and the current line number.
+			If the value returned by the function is a string it
+			becomes the text of the line in the current turn. The
+			default for [range] is the whole file: "1,$".
+							{not in Vi}
 
 Examples:
 >
@@ -88,11 +92,9 @@ Examples:
 All these commands execute a Lua chunk from either the command line (:lua and
 :luado) or a file (:luafile) with the given line [range]. Similarly to the Lua
 interpreter, each chunk has its own scope and so only global variables are
-shared between command calls. Lua default libraries "table", "string", "math",
-and "package" are available, "io" and "debug" are not, and "os" is restricted
-to functions "date", "clock", "time", "difftime", and "getenv". In addition,
-Lua "print" function has its output redirected to the Vim message area, with
-arguments separated by a white space instead of a tab.
+shared between command calls. All Lua default libraries are available. In
+addition, Lua "print" function has its output redirected to the Vim message
+area, with arguments separated by a white space instead of a tab.
 
 Lua uses the "vim" module (see |lua-vim|) to issue commands to Vim
 and manage buffers (|lua-buffer|) and windows (|lua-window|). However,
@@ -108,9 +110,9 @@ input range are stored in "vim.firstline" and "vim.lastline" respectively. The
 module also includes routines for buffer, window, and current line queries,
 Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.
 
-	vim.isbuffer(value)	Returns 'true' (boolean, not string) if
-				"value" is a buffer userdata and 'false'
-				otherwise (see |lua-buffer|).
+	vim.list()		Returns an empty list (see |List|).
+
+	vim.dict()		Returns an empty dictionary (see |Dictionary|).
 
 	vim.buffer([arg])	If "arg" is a number, returns buffer with
 				number "arg" in the buffer list or, if "arg"
@@ -121,16 +123,21 @@ Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.
 				'true' returns the first buffer in the buffer
 				list or else the current buffer.
 
-	vim.iswindow(value)	Returns 'true' (boolean, not string) if
-				"value" is a window userdata and
-				'false' otherwise (see |lua-window|).
-
 	vim.window([arg])	If "arg" is a number, returns window with
 				number "arg" or 'nil' (nil value, not string)
 				if not found. Otherwise, if "toboolean(arg)"
 				is 'true' returns the first window or else the
 				current window.
 
+	vim.type({arg})		Returns the type of {arg}. It is equivalent to
+				Lua's "type" function, but returns "list",
+				"dict", "buffer", or "window" if {arg} is a
+				list, dictionary, buffer, or window,
+				respectively. Examples: >
+					:lua l = vim.list()
+					:lua print(type(l), vim.type(l))
+					:" userdata list
+<
 	vim.command({cmd})	Executes the vim (ex-mode) command {cmd}.
 				Examples: >
 					:lua vim.command"set tw=60"
@@ -141,7 +148,7 @@ Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.
 				Vim strings and numbers are directly converted
 				to Lua strings and numbers respectively. Vim
 				lists and dictionaries are converted to Lua
-				tables (lists become integer-keyed tables).
+				userdata (see |lua-list| and |lua-dict|).
 				Examples: >
 					:lua tw = vim.eval"&tw"
 					:lua print(vim.eval"{'a': 'one'}".a)
@@ -157,7 +164,72 @@ Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.
 
 
 ==============================================================================
-3. Buffer userdata					*lua-buffer*
+3. List userdata					*lua-list*
+
+List userdata represent vim lists, and the interface tries to follow closely
+Vim's syntax for lists. Since lists are objects, changes in list references in
+Lua are reflected in Vim and vice-versa. A list "l" has the following
+properties and methods:
+
+Properties
+----------
+	o "#l" is the number of items in list "l", equivalent to "len(l)"
+	    in Vim.
+	o "l[k]" returns the k-th item in "l"; "l" is zero-indexed, as in Vim.
+	    To modify the k-th item, simply do "l[k] = newitem"; in
+	    particular, "l[k] = nil" removes the k-th item from "l".
+	o "l()" returns an iterator for "l".
+
+Methods
+-------
+	o "l:add(item)" appends "item" to the end of "l".
+	o "l:insert(item[, pos])" inserts "item" at (optional)
+	    position "pos" in the list. The default value for "pos" is 0.
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:let l = [1, 'item']
+	:lua l = vim.eval('l') -- same 'l'
+	:lua l:add(vim.list())
+	:lua l[0] = math.pi
+	:echo l[0] " 3.141593
+	:lua l[0] = nil -- remove first item
+	:lua l:insert(true, 1)
+	:lua print(l, #l, l[0], l[1], l[-1])
+	:lua for item in l() do print(item) end
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+4. Dict userdata					*lua-dict*
+
+Similarly to list userdata, dict userdata represent vim dictionaries; since
+dictionaries are also objects, references are kept between Lua and Vim. A dict
+"d" has the following properties:
+
+Properties
+----------
+	o "#d" is the number of items in dict "d", equivalent to "len(d)"
+	    in Vim.
+	o "d.key" or "d['key']" returns the value at entry "key" in "d".
+	    To modify the entry at this key, simply do "d.key = newvalue"; in
+	    particular, "d.key = nil" removes the entry from "d".
+	o "d()" returns an iterator for "d" and is equivalent to "items(d)" in
+	    Vim.
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:let d = {'n':10}
+	:lua d = vim.eval('d') -- same 'd'
+	:lua print(d, d.n, #d)
+	:let d.self = d
+	:lua for k, v in d() do print(d, k, v) end
+	:lua d.x = math.pi
+	:lua d.self = nil -- remove entry
+	:echo d
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+5. Buffer userdata					*lua-buffer*
 
 Buffer userdata represent vim buffers. A buffer userdata "b" has the following
 properties and methods:
@@ -209,7 +281,7 @@ Examples:
 <
 
 ==============================================================================
-4. Window userdata					*lua-window*
+6. Window userdata					*lua-window*
 
 Window objects represent vim windows. A window userdata "w" has the following
 properties and methods:
@@ -241,4 +313,29 @@ Examples:
 <
 
 ==============================================================================
- vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
+7. The luaeval function					*lua-luaeval* *lua-eval*
+
+The (dual) equivalent of "vim.eval" for passing Lua values to Vim is
+"luaeval". "luaeval" takes an expression string and an optional argument and
+returns the result of the expression. It is semantically equivalent in Lua to:
+>
+	local chunkheader = "local _A = select(1, ...) return "
+	function luaeval (expstr, arg)
+	    local chunk = assert(loadstring(chunkheader .. expstr, "luaeval"))
+	    return chunk(arg) -- return typval
+	end
+<
+Note that "_A" receives the argument to "luaeval". Examples: >
+
+	:echo luaeval('math.pi')
+	:lua a = vim.list():add('newlist')
+	:let a = luaeval('a')
+	:echo a[0] " 'newlist'
+	:function Rand(x,y) " random uniform between x and y
+	:  return luaeval('(_A.y-_A.x)*math.random()+_A.x', {'x':a:x,'y':a:y})
+	:  endfunction
+	:echo Rand(1,10)
+
+
+==============================================================================
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_perl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 21
+*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 25
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sven Verdoolaege
@@ -44,15 +44,17 @@ The Perl patches for Vim were made by:
 	Sven Verdoolaege <skimo@breughel.ufsia.ac.be>
 	Matt Gerassimof
 
-Perl for MS-Windows can be found at:
-http://www.perl.com/CPAN/ports/nt/Standard/x86/
+Perl for MS-Windows can be found at: http://www.perl.com/
+The ActiveState one should work.
 
 ==============================================================================
 3. Using the Perl interface				*perl-using*
 
 							*:perl* *:pe*
 :pe[rl] {cmd}		Execute Perl command {cmd}.  The current package
-			is "main".
+			is "main".  Simple example to test if `:perl` is
+			working: >
+				:perl VIM::Msg("Hello")
 
 :pe[rl] << {endpattern}
 {script}
@@ -173,7 +175,8 @@ VIM::Windows([{wn}...])	With no arguments, returns a list of all the windows
 VIM::DoCommand({cmd})	Executes Ex command {cmd}.
 
 							*perl-Eval*
-VIM::Eval({expr})	Evaluates {expr} and returns (success, val).
+VIM::Eval({expr})	Evaluates {expr} and returns (success, value) in list 
+			context or just value in scalar context.
 			success=1 indicates that val contains the value of
 			{expr}; success=0 indicates a failure to evaluate
 			the expression.  '@x' returns the contents of register

runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Feb 04
+*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Sep 23
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -6,13 +6,14 @@
 
 The Python Interface to Vim				*python* *Python*
 
-1. Commands			|python-commands|
-2. The vim module		|python-vim|
-3. Buffer objects		|python-buffer|
-4. Range objects		|python-range|
-5. Window objects		|python-window|
-6. Dynamic loading		|python-dynamic|
-7. Python 3			|python3|
+1. Commands					|python-commands|
+2. The vim module				|python-vim|
+3. Buffer objects				|python-buffer|
+4. Range objects				|python-range|
+5. Window objects				|python-window|
+6. pyeval(), py3eval() Vim functions		|python-pyeval|
+7. Dynamic loading				|python-dynamic|
+8. Python 3					|python3|
 
 {Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
@@ -26,7 +27,9 @@ The Python 3 interface is available only when Vim was compiled with the
 
 					*:python* *:py* *E205* *E263* *E264*
 :[range]py[thon] {stmt}
-			Execute Python statement {stmt}.
+			Execute Python statement {stmt}.  A simple check if
+			the `:python` command is working: >
+				:python print "Hello"
 
 :[range]py[thon] << {endmarker}
 {script}
@@ -150,6 +153,42 @@ vim.eval(str)						*python-eval*
 	[{'cmd': '/^eval_expr(arg, nextcmd)$/', 'static': 0, 'name':
 	'eval_expr', 'kind': 'f', 'filename': './src/eval.c'}]
 
+vim.bindeval(str)					*python-bindeval*
+	Like |python-eval|, but
+	1. if expression evaluates to |List| or |Dictionary| it is returned as 
+	   vimlist or vimdictionary python type that are connected to original 
+	   list or dictionary. Thus modifications to these objects imply 
+	   modifications of the original.
+
+	   Additionally, vimlist and vimdictionary type have read-write 
+	   `.locked` attribute that returns
+	     Value           Meaning ~
+	     zero            Variable is not locked
+	     vim.VAR_LOCKED  Variable is locked, but can be unlocked
+	     vim.VAR_FIXED   Variable is locked and can't be unlocked
+	   integer constants. If variable is not fixed, you can do 
+	   `var.locked=True` to lock it and `var.locked=False` to unlock. 
+	   There is no recursive locking like |:lockvar|! does. There is also 
+	   no way to lock a specific key or check whether it is locked (in any 
+	   case these locks are ignored by anything except |:let|: |extend()| 
+	   does not care, neither does python interface).
+
+	   Vimdictionary type also supports `.scope` attribute which is one of
+	     Value              Meaning ~
+	     zero               Dictionary is not a scope one
+	     vim.VAR_DEF_SCOPE  Function-local or global scope dictionary
+	     vim.VAR_SCOPE      Other scope dictionary
+
+	2. if expression evaluates to a function reference, then it returns 
+	   callable vimfunction object. Use self keyword argument to assign 
+	   |self| object for dictionary functions.
+
+	Note: this function has the same behavior as |lua-eval| (except that 
+	      lua does not support running vim functions), |python-eval| is 
+	      kept for backwards compatibility in order not to make scripts 
+	      relying on outputs of vim.eval() being a copy of original or 
+	      vim.eval("1") returning a string.
+
 
 
 Error object of the "vim" module
@@ -319,7 +358,13 @@ The height attribute is writable only if the screen is split horizontally.
 The width attribute is writable only if the screen is split vertically.
 
 ==============================================================================
-6. Dynamic loading					*python-dynamic*
+6. pyeval() and py3eval() Vim functions			*python-pyeval*
+
+To facilitate bi-directional interface, you can use |pyeval()| and |py3eval()| 
+functions to evaluate Python expressions and pass their values to VimL.
+
+==============================================================================
+7. Dynamic loading					*python-dynamic*
 
 On MS-Windows the Python library can be loaded dynamically.  The |:version|
 output then includes |+python/dyn|.
@@ -336,13 +381,16 @@ Currently the name is "python24.dll".  That is for Python 2.4.  To know for
 sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "python\d*.dll\c".
 
 ==============================================================================
-7. Python 3						*python3*
+8. Python 3						*python3*
 
 							*:py3* *:python3*
-The |:py3| and |:python3| commands work similar to |:python|.
-							*:py3file*
+The |:py3| and |:python3| commands work similar to |:python|.  A simple check
+if the `:py3` command is wrong: >
+	:py3 print("Hello")
+<							*:py3file*
 The |:py3file| command works similar to |:pyfile|.
 
+
 Vim can be built in four ways (:version output):
 1. No Python support	    (-python, -python3)
 2. Python 2 support only    (+python or +python/dyn, -python3)

runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Oct 27
+*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Shugo Maeda
@@ -25,7 +25,8 @@ downloading Ruby there.
 1. Commands						*ruby-commands*
 
 							*:ruby* *:rub*
-:rub[y] {cmd}		Execute Ruby command {cmd}.
+:rub[y] {cmd}		Execute Ruby command {cmd}.  A command to try it out: >
+				:ruby print "Hello"
 
 :rub[y] << {endpattern}
 {script}
@@ -40,9 +41,6 @@ downloading Ruby there.
 			wasn't compiled in.  To avoid errors, see
 			|script-here|.
 
-Command to try it out: >
-	:ruby print "Hello"   # this is a comment
-
 Example Vim script: >
 
 	function! RedGem()
@@ -211,6 +209,8 @@ for sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "ruby\d*.dll\c".
 
 If you want to build Vim with Ruby 1.9.1, you need to edit the config.h file
 and comment-out the check for _MSC_VER.
+You may also need to rename the include directory name to match the version,
+strangely for Ruby 1.9.3 the directory is called 1.9.1.
 
 ==============================================================================
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Aug 16
+*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Ingo Wilken
@@ -27,7 +27,9 @@ comments, ideas etc to <Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de>
 1. Commands				*tcl-ex-commands* *E571* *E572*
 
 							*:tcl* *:tc*
-:tc[l] {cmd}		Execute Tcl command {cmd}.
+:tc[l] {cmd}		Execute Tcl command {cmd}.  A simple check if `:tcl`
+			is working: >
+				:tcl puts "Hello"
 
 :[range]tc[l] << {endmarker}
 {script}

runtime/doc/indent.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Sep 02
+*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -459,6 +459,22 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 			      argument);	argument);
 		  a_short_line(argument,    a_short_line(argument,
 			       argument);		 argument);
+<
+							*cino-k*
+	kN    When in unclosed parentheses which follow "if", "for" or
+	      "while" and N is non-zero, overrides the behaviour defined by
+	      "(N": causes the indent to be N characters relative to the outer
+	      context (i.e. the line where "if", "for" or "while" is).  Has
+	      no effect on deeper levels of nesting.  Affects flags like "wN"
+	      only for the "if", "for" and "while" conditions.  If 0, defaults
+	      to behaviour defined by the "(N" flag.  (default: 0).
+
+		cino=(0			   cino=(0,ks >
+		  if (condition1	    if (condition1
+		      && condition2)		    && condition2)
+		      action();			action();
+		  function(argument1	    function(argument1
+			   && argument2);	     && argument2);
 <
 							*cino-m*
 	mN    When N is non-zero, line up a line starting with a closing
@@ -524,20 +540,20 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 								*cino-star*
 	*N    Vim searches for unclosed comments at most N lines away.  This
 	      limits the time needed to search for the start of a comment.
-	      If your /* */ comments stop indenting afer N lines this is the
+	      If your /* */ comments stop indenting after N lines this is the
 	      value you will want to change.
 	      (default 70 lines).
 
 								*cino-#*
 	#N    When N is non-zero recognize shell/Perl comments, starting with
-	      '#'.  Default N is zero: don't recognizes '#' comments.  Note
+	      '#'.  Default N is zero: don't recognize '#' comments.  Note
 	      that lines starting with # will still be seen as preprocessor
 	      lines.
 
 
 The defaults, spelled out in full, are:
 	cinoptions=>s,e0,n0,f0,{0,}0,^0,L-1,:s,=s,l0,b0,gs,hs,N0,ps,ts,is,+s,
-			c3,C0,/0,(2s,us,U0,w0,W0,m0,j0,J0,)20,*70,#0
+			c3,C0,/0,(2s,us,U0,w0,W0,k0,m0,j0,J0,)20,*70,#0
 
 Vim puts a line in column 1 if:
 - It starts with '#' (preprocessor directives), if 'cinkeys' contains '#'.

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Aug 06
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jul 25
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -719,6 +719,8 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |gH|		gH		   start Select line mode
 |gI|		gI		2  like "I", but always start in column 1
 |gJ|		gJ		2  join lines without inserting space
+|gN|		gN	      1,2  find the previous match with the last used
+				   search pattern and Visually select it
 |gP|		["x]gP		2  put the text [from register x] before the
 				   cursor N times, leave the cursor after it
 |gQ|		gQ		    switch to "Ex" mode with Vim editing
@@ -751,6 +753,8 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 				   lines down
 |gk|		gk		1  like "k", but when 'wrap' on go N screen
 				   lines up
+|gn|		gn	      1,2  find the next match with the last used
+				   search pattern and Visually select it
 |gm|		gm		1  go to character at middle of the screenline
 |go|		go		1  cursor to byte N in the buffer
 |gp|		["x]gp		2  put the text [from register x] after the

runtime/doc/insert.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 26
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jul 10
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -383,8 +383,11 @@ will then always put the cursor on it).  Or use CTRL-\ CTRL-O, but then
 beware of the cursor possibly being beyond the end of the line.
 
 The CTRL-O command takes you to Normal mode.  If you then use a command enter
-Insert mode again it doesn't nest.  Thus when typing "a<C-O>a" and then <Esc>
-takes you back to Normal mode, you do not need to type <Esc> twice.
+Insert mode again it normally doesn't nest.  Thus when typing "a<C-O>a" and
+then <Esc> takes you back to Normal mode, you do not need to type <Esc> twice.
+An exception is when not typing the command, e.g. when executing a mapping or
+sourcing a script.  This makes mappings work that briefly switch to Insert
+mode.
 
 The shifted cursor keys are not available on all terminals.
 
@@ -398,7 +401,12 @@ An example for using CTRL-G u: >
 
 This redefines the backspace key to start a new undo sequence.  You can now
 undo the effect of the backspace key, without changing what you typed before
-that, with CTRL-O u.
+that, with CTRL-O u.  Another example: >
+
+	:inoremap <CR> <C-]><C-G>u<CR>
+
+This breaks undo at each line break.  It also expands abbreviations before
+this.
 
 Using CTRL-O splits undo: the text typed before and after it is undone
 separately.  If you want to avoid this (e.g., in a mapping) you might be able
@@ -483,7 +491,7 @@ option}
 							*ins-smarttab*
 When the 'smarttab' option is on, a <Tab> inserts 'shiftwidth' positions at
 the beginning of a line and 'tabstop' positions in other places.  This means
-that often spaces instead of a <Tab> character are inserted.  When 'smarttab
+that often spaces instead of a <Tab> character are inserted.  When 'smarttab'
 is off, a <Tab> always inserts 'tabstop' positions, and 'shiftwidth' is only
 used for ">>" and the like.  {not in Vi}
 
@@ -1009,9 +1017,13 @@ The function must return the column where the completion starts.  It must be a
 number between zero and the cursor column "col('.')".  This involves looking
 at the characters just before the cursor and including those characters that
 could be part of the completed item.  The text between this column and the
-cursor column will be replaced with the matches.  Return -1 if no completion
-can be done, the completion will be cancelled with an error message.  Return
--2 to cancel silently.
+cursor column will be replaced with the matches.
+
+Special return values:
+   -1 If no completion can be done, the completion will be cancelled with an
+      error message.
+   -2 To cancel silently and stay in completion mode.
+   -3 To cancel silently and leave completion mode.
 
 On the second invocation the arguments are:
    a:findstart  0
@@ -1032,6 +1044,8 @@ that contains the List.  The Dict can have these items:
 			leading text is changed.
 Other items are ignored.
 
+For acting upon end of completion, see the |CompleteDone| autocommand event.
+
 For example, the function can contain this: >
 	let matches = ... list of words ...
 	return {'words': matches, 'refresh': 'always'}

runtime/doc/intro.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 15
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Sep 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -394,6 +394,8 @@ CTRL-{char}	{char} typed as a control character; that is, typing {char}
 							*quotecommandquote*
 "command"	A reference to a command that you can type is enclosed in
 		double quotes.
+`command`		New style command, this distinguishes it from other
+		quoted text and strings.
 
 					*key-notation* *key-codes* *keycodes*
 These names for keys are used in the documentation.  They can also be used

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Feb 02
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Apr 13
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ reported if any are supplied).  However, it is possible to specify that the
 command can take arguments, using the -nargs attribute.  Valid cases are:
 
 	-nargs=0    No arguments are allowed (the default)
-	-nargs=1    Exactly one argument is require, it includes spaces 
+	-nargs=1    Exactly one argument is required, it includes spaces 
 	-nargs=*    Any number of arguments are allowed (0, 1, or many),
 		    separated by white space
 	-nargs=?    0 or 1 arguments are allowed
@@ -1219,6 +1219,7 @@ completion can be enabled:
 
 	-complete=augroup	autocmd groups
 	-complete=buffer	buffer names
+	-complete=behave	:behave suboptions
 	-complete=color		color schemes
 	-complete=command	Ex command (and arguments)
 	-complete=compiler	compilers
@@ -1233,6 +1234,7 @@ completion can be enabled:
 	-complete=function	function name
 	-complete=help		help subjects
 	-complete=highlight	highlight groups
+	-complete=history	:history suboptions
 	-complete=locale	locale names (as output of locale -a)
 	-complete=mapping	mapping name
 	-complete=menu		menus
@@ -1242,6 +1244,7 @@ completion can be enabled:
 	-complete=syntax	syntax file names |'syntax'|
 	-complete=tag		tags
 	-complete=tag_listfiles	tags, file names are shown when CTRL-D is hit
+	-complete=user		user names
 	-complete=var		user variables
 	-complete=custom,{func} custom completion, defined via {func}
 	-complete=customlist,{func} custom completion, defined via {func}

runtime/doc/mbyte.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Oct 15
+*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ Useful utilities for converting the charset:
 	|charset| converter.  Supported |charset|: ISO-2022-CN, ISO-2022-JP,
 	ISO-2022-KR, EUC-CN, EUC-JP, EUC-KR, EUC-TW, UTF-7, UTF-8, ISO-8859
 	series, Shift_JIS, Big5 and HZ.  Lv can be found at:
-	http://www.ff.iij4u.or.jp/~nrt/freeware/lv4495.tar.gz
+	http://www.ff.iij4u.or.jp/~nrt/lv/index.html
 
 
 							*mbyte-conversion*
@@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Each field means:
 	    charsets, such as JIS X 0208, if this field is 0, code points has
 	    the same value as GL, and GR if 1.
 
-For example, in case of a 14 dots font corresponding to JIS X 0208, it is
+For example, in case of a 16 dots font corresponding to JIS X 0208, it is
 written like:
     -misc-fixed-medium-r-normal--16-110-100-100-c-160-jisx0208.1990-0
 
@@ -857,7 +857,7 @@ Use the RPM or port for your system.
 
 
 USING XIM			*multibyte-input* *E284* *E286* *E287* *E288*
-				*E285* *E291* *E292* *E290* *E289*
+				*E285* *E289*
 
 Note that Display and Input are independent.  It is possible to see your
 language even though you have no input method for it.  But when your Display
@@ -1085,6 +1085,13 @@ Since the mapping is defined with |:lnoremap| the resulting quote will not be
 used for the start of another character.
 The "accents" keymap uses this.				*keymap-accents*
 
+The first column can also be in |<>| form:
+	<C-c>		Ctrl-C
+	<A-c>		Alt-c
+	<A-C>		Alt-C
+Note that the Alt mappings may not work, depending on your keyboard and
+terminal.
+
 Although it's possible to have more than one character in the second column,
 this is unusual.  But you can use various ways to specify the character: >
 	A	a		literal character

runtime/doc/motion.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jul 19
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ or change text.  The following operators are available:
 	|>|	>	shift right
 	|<|	<	shift left
 	|zf|	zf	define a fold
-	|g@|    g@      call function set with the 'operatorfunc' option
+	|g@|	g@	call function set with the 'operatorfunc' option
 
 If the motion includes a count and the operator also had a count before it,
 the two counts are multiplied.  For example: "2d3w" deletes six words.
@@ -326,6 +326,7 @@ gg			Goto line [count], default first line, on the first
 			non-blank character |linewise|.  If 'startofline' not
 			set, keep the same column.
 
+							*:[range]*
 :[range]		Set the cursor on the last line number in [range].
 			[range] can also be just one line number, e.g., ":1"
 			or ":'m".
@@ -513,6 +514,8 @@ always select less text than the "a" commands.
 These commands are {not in Vi}.
 These commands are not available when the |+textobjects| feature has been
 disabled at compile time.
+Also see `gn` and `gN`, operating on the last search pattern.
+
 							*v_aw* *aw*
 aw			"a word", select [count] words (see |word|).
 			Leading or trailing white space is included, but not
@@ -689,6 +692,7 @@ movement commands are used.
 	"daw"	delete a word				*daw*
 	"diW"	delete inner WORD (see |WORD|)		*diW*
 	"daW"	delete a WORD (see |WORD|)		*daW*
+	"dgn"   delete the next search pattern match    *dgn*
 	"dd"	delete one line				|dd|
 	"dis"	delete inner sentence			*dis*
 	"das"	delete a sentence			*das*
@@ -750,6 +754,13 @@ m[  or  m]		Set the |'[| or |']| mark.  Useful when an operator is
 			to be simulated by multiple commands.  (does not move
 			the cursor, this is not a motion command).
 
+						*m<* *m>*
+m<  or  m>		Set the |'<| or |'>| mark.  Useful to change what the
+			`gv` command selects.  (does not move the cursor, this
+			is not a motion command).
+			Note that the Visual mode cannot be set, only the
+			start and end position.
+
 						*:ma* *:mark* *E191*
 :[range]ma[rk] {a-zA-Z'}
 			Set mark {a-zA-Z'} at last line number in [range],

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Feb 22
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	- Reset the 'rightleft' option.
 	- Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
 	Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
-	option.
+	option).
 	Also see |arabic.txt|.
 
 					*'arabicshape'* *'arshape'*
@@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			feature}
 	When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
 	corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
-	take affect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
+	take effect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
 	one which encompasses:
 	  a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
 	     within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
@@ -1047,6 +1047,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
 	default value.  "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.
 
+	WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write
+	your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
+	lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only disable
+	backups if you don't care about losing the file.
+
 	Note that environment variables are not expanded.  If you want to use
 	$HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: >
 		:let backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*'
@@ -1102,8 +1107,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans
 	or Sun Workshop).
 
-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
 
 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'balloonexpr' |textlock|.
@@ -1447,6 +1452,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This option is a list of comma separated names.
 	These names are recognized:
 
+						*clipboard-unnamed*
 	unnamed		When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'
 			for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
 			would normally go to the unnamed register.  When a
@@ -1456,6 +1462,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			explicitly accessed using the "* notation.  Also see
 			|gui-clipboard|.
 
+						*clipboard-unnamedplus*
 	unnamedplus	A variant of "unnamed" flag which uses the clipboard
 			register '+' (|quoteplus|) instead of register '*' for
 			all operations except yank.  Yank shall copy the text
@@ -1465,6 +1472,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			Availability can be checked with: >
 				if has('unnamedplus')
 <
+						*clipboard-autoselect*
 	autoselect	Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,
 			then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual
 			area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the
@@ -1476,9 +1484,16 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			"autoselect" flag is used.
 			Also applies to the modeless selection.
 
+						*clipboard-autoselectplus*
+	autoselectplus  Like "autoselect" but using the + register instead of
+			the * register.  Compare to the 'P' flag in
+			'guioptions'.
+
+						*clipboard-autoselectml*
 	autoselectml	Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection
 			only.  Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.
 
+						*clipboard-html*
 	html		When the clipboard contains HTML, use this when
 			pasting.  When putting text on the clipboard, mark it
 			as HTML.  This works to copy rendered HTML from
@@ -1489,6 +1504,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			Only supported for GTK version 2 and later.
 			Only available with the |+multi_byte| feature.
 
+						*clipboard-exclude*
 	exclude:{pattern}
 			Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of
 			the terminal 'term'.  If there is a match, no
@@ -2125,7 +2141,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			and the cursor is right in front of the searched
 			character, the cursor won't move. When not included,
 			the cursor would skip over it and jump to the
-			following occurence.
+			following occurrence.
 
 	POSIX flags.  These are not included in the Vi default value, except
 	when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix|
@@ -3035,8 +3051,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
 	for each line to obtain its fold level.  See |fold-expr|.
 
-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
 	This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
 	on.
 
@@ -3178,8 +3194,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
 	fold.  See |fold-foldtext|.
 
-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
 
 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|.
@@ -3224,8 +3240,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	format function will be used |C-indenting|.
 	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
 	about including spaces and backslashes.
-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
 
 						*'formatexpr'* *'fex'*
 'formatexpr' 'fex'	string (default "")
@@ -3258,9 +3274,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
 	the internal format mechanism.
 
-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working, since changing
-	the buffer text is not allowed.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working,
+	since changing the buffer text is not allowed.
 
 						*'fsync'* *'fs'*
 'fsync' 'fs'		boolean	(default on)
@@ -3584,6 +3600,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
 		by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
 		The same applies to the modeless selection.
+								*'go-P'*
+	  'P'	Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "*
+	  	register.
 								*'go-A'*
 	  'A'	Autoselect for the modeless selection.  Like 'a', but only
 		applies to the modeless selection.
@@ -3772,9 +3791,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'highlight' 'hl'	string	(default (as a single string):
 				     "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
 				     e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
-				     M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
-				     s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit,
-				     t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
+				     M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,N:CursorLineNr,
+				     r:Question,s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,
+				     c:VertSplit, t:Title,v:Visual,
+				     w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
 				     f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
 				     C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
 				     >:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,
@@ -3800,6 +3820,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|hl-ModeMsg|	 M  Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
 	|hl-LineNr|	 n  line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and
 			    when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set.
+	|hl-CursorLineNr|  N like n for when 'cursorline' is set.
 	|hl-Question|	 r  |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
 	|hl-StatusLine|	 s  status line of current window |status-line|
 	|hl-StatusLineNC| S  status lines of not-current windows
@@ -4079,8 +4100,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	found.  Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
 	Also used for |<cfile>|.
 
-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
 
 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|.
@@ -4144,8 +4165,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	See |indent-expression|.
 	NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.
 
-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
 
 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|.
@@ -4574,24 +4595,31 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command.  It is a
 	comma separated list of string settings.
+	  						*lcs-eol*
 	  eol:c		Character to show at the end of each line.  When
 			omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
 			line.
+	  						*lcs-tab*
 	  tab:xy	Two characters to be used to show a tab.  The first
 			char is used once.  The second char is repeated to
 			fill the space that the tab normally occupies.
 			"tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as
 			">---".  When omitted, a tab is show as ^I.
+	  						*lcs-trail*
 	  trail:c	Character to show for trailing spaces.  When omitted,
 			trailing spaces are blank.
+	  						*lcs-extends*
 	  extends:c	Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
 			off and the line continues beyond the right of the
 			screen.
+	  						*lcs-precedes*
 	  precedes:c	Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
 			is off and there is text preceding the character
 			visible in the first column.
+	  						*lcs-conceal*
 	  conceal:c	Character to show in place of concealed text, when
 			'conceallevel' is set to 1.
+	  						*lcs-nbsp*
 	  nbsp:c	Character to show for a non-breakable space (character
 			0xA0, 160).  Left blank when omitted.
 
@@ -5078,7 +5106,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	number.
 	When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
 	characters are put before the number.
-	See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
+	See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
+	the number.
 	When setting this option, 'relativenumber' is reset.
 
 						*'numberwidth'* *'nuw'*
@@ -5111,6 +5140,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	invoked and what it should return.
 	This option is usually set by a filetype plugin:
 	|:filetype-plugin-on|
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
 
 
 			    *'opendevice'* *'odev'* *'noopendevice'* *'noodev'*
@@ -5477,7 +5508,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	number.
 	When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
 	characters are put before the number.
-	See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
+	See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
+	the number.
 	When setting this option, 'number' is reset.
 
 						*'remap'* *'noremap'*
@@ -6087,6 +6119,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			local to buffer
 	Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent.  Used for
 	|'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.
+	When zero the 'ts' value will be used.  Use the |shiftwidth()|
+	function to get the effective shiftwidth value.
 
 						*'shortmess'* *'shm'*
 'shortmess' 'shm'	string	(Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "",
@@ -6290,7 +6324,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
 	case characters.  Only used when the search pattern is typed and
 	'ignorecase' option is on.  Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
-	":g" and ":s".  Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc..  After
+	":g" and ":s".  Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.  After
 	"*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
 	recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
@@ -6350,6 +6384,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'.  However,
 	commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
 	When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
+	When 'sts' is negative, the value of 'shiftwidth' is used.
 	'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
 	See also |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
 	spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
@@ -6563,6 +6598,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	evaluated and the result is used as the option value.  Example: >
 		:set statusline=%!MyStatusLine()
 <	The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too.
+	Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the
+	current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the
+	context of the window that the statusline belongs to.
 
 	When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made
 	empty to avoid further errors.  Otherwise screen updating would loop.
@@ -6668,8 +6706,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the
 	real current buffer.
 
-	The 'statusline' option may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from
+	a modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
 
 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|.
@@ -7112,8 +7150,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by
 	non-keyword characters (white space is preferred).  Maximum line
 	length is 510 bytes.
-	To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at
-	http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk .
+	To obtain a file to be used here, check out this ftp site:
+	ftp://ftp.ox.ac.uk/pub/wordlists/  First get the README file.
 	To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
 	after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
 	name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
@@ -7390,6 +7428,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   pterm	QNX pterm mouse handling.
 							*urxvt-mouse*
 	   urxvt	Mouse handling for the urxvt (rxvt-unicode) terminal.
+							*sgr-mouse*
+	   sgr		Mouse handling for the terminal that emits SGR-styled
+			mouse reporting. Works with xterm version 277 or
+			later.
 
 	The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
 	|+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
@@ -7402,6 +7444,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	or "xterm2" already.  The main use of this option is to set it to
 	"xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
 	handle xterm mouse codes.
+	The "sgr" value will be set if the xterm version is 277 or later.
 	The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
 	95 or higher.  This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
 	feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
@@ -7453,7 +7496,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|.
 	The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from
 	before a reload to be saved for undo.
-	WARNING: this is a very new feature.  Use at your own risk!
+	When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted.
 
 						*'undolevels'* *'ul'*
 'undolevels' 'ul'	number	(default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
@@ -7829,9 +7872,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
 			feature}
 	A list of file patterns.  A file that matches with one of these
-	patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names, and
-	influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and |globpath()| unless
-	a flag is passed to disable this.
+	patterns is ignored when expanding |wildcards|, completing file or
+	directory names, and influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and
+	|globpath()| unless a flag is passed to disable this.
 	The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
 	Also see 'suffixes'.
 	Example: >
@@ -8133,8 +8176,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Make a backup before overwriting a file.  The backup is removed after
 	the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
-	also on.  Reset this option if your file system is almost full.  See
-	|backup-table| for another explanation.
+	also on.
+	WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write
+	your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
+	lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only reset
+	this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write
+	fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful).
+	See |backup-table| for another explanation.
 	When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is
 	set.

runtime/doc/os_win32.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_win32.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Aug 14
+*os_win32.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 May 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by George Reilly
@@ -314,8 +314,8 @@ A. When using :! to run an external command, you can run it with "start": >
    not have to be closed before Vim.
    To avoid this special treatment, use ":! start".
    There are two optional arguments (see the next Q):
-       /min  the window will be minimized.
-       /b"   no console window will be opened
+       /min  the window will be minimized
+       /b    no console window will be opened
    You can use only one of these flags at a time.  A second one will be
    treated as the start of the command.
 

runtime/doc/pattern.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Nov 26
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 May 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -637,10 +637,10 @@ overview.
 							*/\@!*
 \@!	Matches with zero width if the preceding atom does NOT match at the
 	current position. |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
-	Like '(?!pattern)" in Perl.
+	Like "(?!pattern)" in Perl.
 	Example			matches ~
 	foo\(bar\)\@!		any "foo" not followed by "bar"
-	a.\{-}p\@!		"a", "ap", "aap", "app", etc. not immediately
+	a.\{-}p\@!		"a", "ap", "app", "appp", etc. not immediately
 				followed by a "p"
 	if \(\(then\)\@!.\)*$	"if " not followed by "then"
 
@@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ overview.
 	does not match.  "a.*p\@!" will match from an "a" to the end of the
 	line, because ".*" can match all characters in the line and the "p"
 	doesn't match at the end of the line.  "a.\{-}p\@!" will match any
-	"a", "ap", "aap", etc. that isn't followed by a "p", because the "."
+	"a", "ap", "app", etc. that isn't followed by a "p", because the "."
 	can match a "p" and "p\@!" doesn't match after that.
 
 	You can't use "\@!" to look for a non-match before the matching
@@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ overview.
 							*/\@<=*
 \@<=	Matches with zero width if the preceding atom matches just before what
 	follows. |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
-	Like '(?<=pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
+	Like "(?<=pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
 	Example			matches ~
 	\(an\_s\+\)\@<=file	"file" after "an" and white space or an
 				end-of-line
@@ -691,7 +691,7 @@ overview.
 	before what follows.  Thus this matches if there is no position in the
 	current or previous line where the atom matches such that it ends just
 	before what follows.  |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
-	Like '(?<!pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
+	Like "(?<!pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
 	The match with the preceding atom is made to end just before the match
 	with what follows, thus an atom that ends in ".*" will work.
 	Warning: This can be slow (because many positions need to be checked

runtime/doc/pi_gzip.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_gzip.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2002 Oct 29
+*pi_gzip.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jul 19
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -25,6 +25,8 @@ with these extensions:
 	*.Z		compress (Lempel-Ziv)
 	*.gz		gzip
 	*.bz2		bzip2
+	*.lzma		lzma
+	*.xz		xz
 
 That's actually the only thing you need to know.  There are no options.
 

runtime/doc/quickfix.txt

@@ -561,7 +561,9 @@ commands can be combined to create a NewGrep command: >
 					*:vim* *:vimgrep* *E682* *E683*
 :vim[grep][!] /{pattern}/[g][j] {file} ...
 			Search for {pattern} in the files {file} ... and set
-			the error list to the matches.
+			the error list to the matches.  Files matching
+			'wildignore' are ignored; files in 'suffixes' are
+			searched last.
 			Without the 'g' flag each line is added only once.
 			With 'g' every match is added.
 
@@ -913,8 +915,8 @@ Basic items
 	%n		error number (finds a number)
 	%m		error message (finds a string)
 	%r		matches the "rest" of a single-line file message %O/P/Q
-	%p		pointer line (finds a sequence of '-', '.' or ' ' and
-			uses the length for the column number)
+	%p		pointer line (finds a sequence of '-', '.', ' ' or
+			tabs and uses the length for the column number)
 	%*{conv}	any scanf non-assignable conversion
 	%%		the single '%' character
 	%s		search text (finds a string)

runtime/doc/repeat.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jan 06
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Mar 23
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ q			Stops recording.  (Implementation note: The 'q' that
 			it was the result of a mapping)  {Vi: no recording}
 
 							*@*
-@{0-9a-z".=*}		Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*} [count]
+@{0-9a-z".=*+}		Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*+} [count]
 			times.  Note that register '%' (name of the current
 			file) and '#' (name of the alternate file) cannot be
 			used.
@@ -123,8 +123,8 @@ q			Stops recording.  (Implementation note: The 'q' that
 							*@@* *E748*
 @@			Repeat the previous @{0-9a-z":*} [count] times.
 
-:[addr]*{0-9a-z".=}						*:@* *:star*
-:[addr]@{0-9a-z".=*}	Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*} as an Ex
+:[addr]*{0-9a-z".=+}						*:@* *:star*
+:[addr]@{0-9a-z".=*+}	Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*+} as an Ex
 			command.  First set cursor at line [addr] (default is
 			current line).  When the last line in the register does
 			not have a <CR> it will be added automatically when

runtime/doc/sign.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*sign.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 04
+*sign.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jul 10
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur
@@ -153,8 +153,14 @@ REMOVING SIGNS						*:sign-unplace* *E159*
 		Remove the previously placed sign {id} from file {fname}.
 		See remark above about {fname} |:sign-fname|.
 
+:sign unplace * file={fname}
+		Remove all placed signs in file {fname}.
+
 :sign unplace {id} buffer={nr}
-		Same, but use buffer {nr}.
+		Remove the previously placed sign {id} from buffer {nr}.
+
+:sign unplace * buffer={nr}
+		Remove all placed signs in buffer {nr}.
 
 :sign unplace {id}
 		Remove the previously placed sign {id} from all files it

runtime/doc/starting.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jul 22
+*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Mar 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -248,7 +248,8 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-g*
--g		Start Vim in GUI mode.  See |gui|.  {not in Vi}
+-g		Start Vim in GUI mode.  See |gui|. For the opposite see |-v|.
+		{not in Vi}
 
 							*-v*
 -v		Start Ex in Vi mode.  Only makes a difference when the

runtime/doc/syntax.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Feb 11
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 28
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -199,7 +199,8 @@ REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE			*mysyntaxfile-replace*
 If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
 version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above.  Just make sure
 that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
-Vim will only load the first syntax file found.
+Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
+b:current_syntax.
 
 
 NAMING CONVENTIONS		    *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
@@ -379,194 +380,23 @@ settings, depending on which syntax is active.	Example: >
 This is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
 window into HTML.  Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
 
+After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser.  The
+colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim.
+
 You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
 Source the script to convert the current file: >
 
 	:runtime! syntax/2html.vim
 <
-							*:TOhtml*
-Or use the ":TOhtml" user command.  It is defined in a standard plugin.
-":TOhtml" also works with a range and in a Visual area: >
-
-	:10,40TOhtml
-
-Warning: This can be slow! The script must process every character of every
-line. Because it can take a long time, by default a progress bar is displayed
-in the statusline for each major step in the conversion process. If you don't
-like seeing this progress bar, you can disable it and get a very minor speed
-improvement with: >
-
-	let g:html_no_progress = 1
-
-":TOhtml" has another special feature: if the window is in diff mode, it will
-generate HTML that shows all the related windows.  This can be disabled by
-setting the g:html_diff_one_file variable: >
-
-	let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
-
-After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser.  The
-colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim.
-
-To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
-command, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first and
-last line to be converted.  Example, using the last set Visual area: >
-
-	:let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
-	:let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
-
-The lines are numbered according to 'number' option and the Number
-highlighting.  You can force lines to be numbered in the HTML output by
-setting "html_number_lines" to non-zero value: >
-   :let g:html_number_lines = 1
-Force to omit the line numbers by using a zero value: >
-   :let g:html_number_lines = 0
-Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
-   :unlet g:html_number_lines
-
-By default, valid HTML 4.01 using cascading style sheets (CSS1) is generated.
-If you need to generate markup for really old browsers or some other user
-agent that lacks basic CSS support, use: >
-   :let g:html_use_css = 0
-
-Concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with the appropriate
-character from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' depending on the current value of
-'conceallevel'. If you always want to display all text in your document,
-either set 'conceallevel' to zero before invoking 2html, or use: >
-   :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
-
-Similarly, closed folds are put in the HTML as they are displayed.  If you
-don't want this, use the |zR| command before invoking 2html, or use: >
-   :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
-
-You may want to generate HTML that includes all the data within the folds, and
-allow the user to view the folded data similar to how they would in Vim. To
-generate this dynamic fold information, use: >
-   :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
-
-Using html_dynamic_folds will imply html_use_css, because it would be far too
-difficult to do it for old browsers. However, html_ignore_folding overrides
-html_dynamic_folds.
-
-Using html_dynamic_folds will default to generating a foldcolumn in the html
-similar to Vim's foldcolumn, that will use javascript to open and close the
-folds in the HTML document. The width of this foldcolumn starts at the current
-setting of |'foldcolumn'| but grows to fit the greatest foldlevel in your
-document. If you do not want to show a foldcolumn at all, use: >
-   :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
-
-Using this option, there will be no foldcolumn available to open the folds in
-the HTML. For this reason, another option is provided: html_hover_unfold.
-Enabling this option will use CSS 2.0 to allow a user to open a fold by
-hovering the mouse pointer over it. Note that old browsers (notably Internet
-Explorer 6) will not support this feature.  Browser-specific markup for IE6 is
-included to fall back to the normal CSS1 code so that the folds show up
-correctly for this browser, but they will not be openable without a
-foldcolumn. Note that using html_hover_unfold will allow modern browsers with
-disabled javascript to view closed folds. To use this option, use: >
-   :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
-
-Setting html_no_foldcolumn with html_dynamic_folds will automatically set
-html_hover_unfold, because otherwise the folds wouldn't be dynamic.
-
-By default "<pre>" and "</pre>" are used around the text. When 'wrap' is set
-in the window being converted, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
-used to wrap the text. You can explicitly enable the wrapping with: >
-   :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
-or disable with >
-   :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
-This generates HTML that looks very close to the Vim window, but unfortunately
-there can be minor differences such as the lack of a 'showbreak' option in in
-the HTML, or where line breaks can occur.
-
-Another way to obtain text wrapping in the HTML, at the risk of making some
-things look even more different, is to use: >
-   :let g:html_no_pre = 1
-This will use <br> at the end of each line and use "&nbsp;" for repeated
-spaces. Doing it this way is more compatible with old browsers, but modern
-browsers support the "white-space" method.
-
-If you do stick with the default "<pre>" tags, <Tab> characters in the text
-are included in the generated output if they will have no effect on the
-appearance of the text and it looks like they are in the document
-intentionally. This allows for the HTML output to be copied and pasted from a
-browser without losing the actual whitespace used in the document.
-
-Specifically, <Tab> characters will be included if the 'tabstop' option is set
-to the default of 8, 'expandtab' is not set, and if neither the foldcolumn nor
-the line numbers are included in the HTML output (see options above). When any
-of these conditions are not met, any <Tab> characters in the text are expanded
-to the appropriate number of spaces in the HTML output.
-
-When "<pre>" is included, you can force |:TOhtml| to keep the tabs even if the
-other conditions are not met with: >
-   :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
-Note that this can easily break text alignment and indentation in the HTML.
-
-Force tabs to be expanded even when they would be kept using: >
-   :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
-
-For diff mode on a single file (with g:html_diff_one_file) a sequence of more
-than 3 filler lines is displayed as three lines with the middle line
-mentioning the total number of inserted lines.  If you prefer to see all the
-inserted lines as with the side-by-side diff, use: >
-    :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
-And to go back to displaying up to three lines again: >
-    :unlet g:html_whole_filler
-
-For most buffers, TOhtml uses the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or
-'encoding' if not, to determine the charset and 'fileencoding' of the HTML
-file. 'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. In general, this
-works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in |encoding-names|,
-but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings which are widely
-supported. However, you can override this to support specific encodings that
-may not be automatically detected by default.
-
-To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
-name of the charset to be used. TOhtml will try to determine the appropriate
-'fileencoding' setting from the charset, but you may need to set it manually
-if TOhtml cannot determine the encoding. It is recommended to set this
-variable to something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be
-hosting on a webserver: >
-   :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
-You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
-entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string: >
-   :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
-To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the g:html_use_encoding
-variable: >
-   :unlet g:html_use_encoding
-
-If you specify a charset with g:html_use_encoding for which TOhtml cannot
-automatically detect the corresponding 'fileencoding' setting, you can use
-g:html_encoding_override to allow TOhtml to detect the correct encoding.
-This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
-pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs. For
-example, to allow TOhtml to detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" properly as
-the encoding "8bit-cp1252", use: >
-   :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
-<
-The g:html_charset_override is similar, it allows TOhtml to detect the HTML
-charset for any 'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected
-automatically. You can also use it to override specific existing
-encoding-charset pairs. For example, TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all
-Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16 and UTF-32 instead, use: >
-   :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
-
-Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
-compatibility problems with at least one major browser.
-
-					    *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML*
-If you do not like plain HTML, an alternative is to have the script generate
-XHTML (XML compliant HTML). To do this set the "html_use_xhtml" variable: >
-    :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
-
-Any of the on/off options listed above can be enabled or disabled by setting
-them explicitly to the desired value, or restored to their default by removing
-the variable using |:unlet|.
+Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
+options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
+the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
+|:unlet|.
 
 Remarks:
 - Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
 - From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
-- This version of TOhtml may work with older versions of Vim, but some
+- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
   features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
   incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
 
@@ -574,6 +404,311 @@ Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
 Unix shell: >
    for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
 <
+					*g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
+To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
+command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
+and last line to be converted.  Example, using the last set Visual area: >
+
+	:let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
+	:let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
+	:runtime! syntax/2html.vim
+<
+							*:TOhtml*
+:[range]TOhtml		The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
+			This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
+			range is given, set |g:html_start_line| and
+			|g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the range,
+			respectively. Default range is the entire buffer.
+
+			If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
+			|g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
+			all windows which are part of the diff in the current
+			tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
+			in the generated HTML.
+
+			Examples: >
+
+	:10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
+	:'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
+	:TOhtml      " convert entire buffer
+<
+							*g:html_diff_one_file*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab page are converted
+to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element.
+When 1, only the current buffer is converted.
+Example: >
+
+	let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
+<
+							 *g:html_whole_filler*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
+is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
+of inserted lines.
+When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
+not set.
+>
+    :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
+<
+				     *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
+2html.vim conversion process.
+When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
+but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
+files it can take a long time!
+Example: >
+
+	let g:html_no_progress = 1
+<
+You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
+run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
+moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
+
+  vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
+<
+Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
+need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
+conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
+script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
+specifying each command separately.
+
+							 *g:html_number_lines*
+Default: current 'number' setting.
+When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
+When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
+highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
+Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
+   :let g:html_number_lines = 1
+Force to omit the line numbers: >
+   :let g:html_number_lines = 0
+Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
+   :unlet g:html_number_lines
+<
+							      *g:html_use_css*
+Default: 1.
+When 1, generate valid HTML 4.01 markup with CSS1 styling, supported in all
+modern browsers and most old browsers.
+When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
+recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
+forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
+Example: >
+   :let g:html_use_css = 0
+<
+						       *g:html_ignore_conceal*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
+from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
+value of 'conceallevel'.
+When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
+|conceal|ed.
+
+Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
+included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
+   :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
+   :setl conceallevel=0
+<
+						       *g:html_ignore_folding*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
+Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
+the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
+When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
+text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
+
+Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
+in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
+   zR
+   :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
+<
+							*g:html_dynamic_folds*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
+When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
+in Vim.
+
+Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
+regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
+
+This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
+>
+   :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
+<
+							*g:html_no_foldcolumn*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
+Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
+open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
+'foldcolumn' setting.
+When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
+folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
+>
+   :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
+<
+				*TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
+Default: empty string.
+This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
+when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
+for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
+line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
+affected in this way as follows:
+	f:	fold column
+	n:	line numbers (also within fold text)
+	t:	fold text
+	d:	diff filler
+
+Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
+	:let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
+<
+This feature is currently implemented by inserting read-only <input> elements
+into the markup to contain the uncopyable areas. This does not work well in
+all cases. When pasting to some applications which understand HTML, the
+<input> elements also get pasted. But plain-text paste destinations should
+always work.
+
+							   *g:html_no_invalid*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, an invalid attribute is
+intentionally inserted into the <input> element for the uncopyable areas. This
+increases the number of applications you can paste to without also pasting the
+<input> elements. Specifically, Microsoft Word will not paste the <input>
+elements if they contain this invalid attribute.
+When 1, no invalid markup is ever intentionally inserted, and the generated
+page should validate. However, be careful pasting into Microsoft Word when
+|g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty; it can be hard to get rid of the <input>
+elements which get pasted.
+
+							 *g:html_hover_unfold*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
+|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
+When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
+cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
+disabled javascript to view the folded text.
+
+Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
+feature.  Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
+normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
+they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
+>
+   :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
+<
+					  *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
+Default: current 'wrap' setting.
+When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
+not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
+When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
+used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
+window.
+Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
+   :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
+Explicitly disable wrapping: >
+   :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
+Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
+   :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
+<
+							       *g:html_no_pre*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
+tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
+characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
+When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
+used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
+references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
+text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
+old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
+the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
+>
+   :let g:html_no_pre = 1
+<
+							  *g:html_expand_tabs*
+Default: 1 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, and no fold column or line
+		numbers occur in the generated HTML;
+	 0 otherwise.
+When 0, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
+number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
+When 1, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
+are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
+allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
+the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
+indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
+
+Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
+   :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
+<
+Force tabs to be expanded: >
+   :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
+<
+				    *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
+It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
+|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
+
+If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
+for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
+'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
+set to match the chosen document encoding.
+
+Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
+|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
+wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
+encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
+below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
+
+Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
+the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
+
+	http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
+	http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
+
+							 *g:html_use_encoding*
+Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
+To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
+name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
+something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
+webserver: >
+   :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
+You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
+entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
+   :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
+To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
+variable: >
+   :unlet g:html_use_encoding
+<
+						    *g:html_encoding_override*
+Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
+		mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
+This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
+specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
+list of conversions.
+
+This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
+pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
+
+Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
+   :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
+<
+						     *g:html_charset_override*
+Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
+		mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
+		browser support.
+This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
+'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
+use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
+TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
+and UTF-32 instead, use: >
+   :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
+
+Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
+compatibility problems with some major browsers.
+
+			*convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
+When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
+>
+    :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
+<
 
 ABEL						*abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
 
@@ -649,7 +784,11 @@ The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
 	asmsyntax=nasm
 Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax.  This line must be
 one of the first five lines in the file.  No non-white text must be
-immediately before or after this text.
+immediately before or after this text.  Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
+equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
+between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
+particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
+highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
 
 The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
 b:asmsyntax variable: >
@@ -754,7 +893,8 @@ c_no_ansi		don't do standard ANSI types and constants
 c_ansi_typedefs		 ... but do standard ANSI types
 c_ansi_constants	 ... but do standard ANSI constants
 c_no_utf		don't highlight \u and \U in strings
-c_syntax_for_h		use C syntax for *.h files, instead of C++
+c_syntax_for_h		for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
+			syntax instead of objcpp
 c_no_if0		don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
 c_no_cformat		don't highlight %-formats in strings
 c_no_c99		don't highlight C99 standard items
@@ -950,6 +1090,10 @@ Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
 or: >
 	:set filetype=docbkxml
 
+You can specify the DocBook version: >
+	:let docbk_ver = 3
+When not set 4 is used.
+
 
 DOSBATCH				*dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
 
@@ -2349,6 +2493,12 @@ This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
 later, and part earlier) adds.
 
 
+RESTRUCTURED TEXT			*rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
+
+You may set what syntax definitions should be used for code blocks via
+	let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
+
+
 REXX						*rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
 
 If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
@@ -2719,7 +2869,14 @@ Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
 prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files.  To do
 this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
       let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
-<
+The comment lines >
+	% nospell{
+	...
+	% nospell}
+will suppress spell checking between them.  These comment lines spelling
+control are known to be fragile; for example, don't include any of the section
+commands (\part, \chapter, \section, \paragraph, etc) inside nospell blocks
+or interleave environments (such as math) across nospell blocks.
 								*tex-verb*
  Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
 
@@ -2826,6 +2983,7 @@ You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
 following sets of characters: >
 
 	a = accents/ligatures
+	b = bold and italic
 	d = delimiters
 	m = math symbols
 	g = Greek
@@ -2834,6 +2992,18 @@ following sets of characters: >
 By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
 substitution will not be made.
 
+						*g:tex_isk*
+ Tex: Controlling What's In A Keyword~
+
+(La)Tex keywords normally use the characters 0-9,a-z,A-Z,192-255 only
+but the "_" is the only one that causes problems.  So, by default,
+syntax/tex.vim overrides the usual |'iskeyword'| setting (using |:setlocal|)
+with one that works for LaTeX.
+
+However, one may override this iskeyword re-setting by setting the
+variable, g:tex_isk, in one's .vimrc to whatever one wishes and
+it will be used instead.
+ 
 
 TF						*tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
 
@@ -2887,7 +3057,7 @@ Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
    g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python   script
    g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby     script
    g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl      script
-
+<
 							*g:vimsyn_noerror*
 Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; VimL is a
 difficult language to highlight correctly.  A way to suppress error
@@ -4421,6 +4591,8 @@ IncSearch	'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
 							*hl-LineNr*
 LineNr		Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
 		or 'relativenumber' option is set.
+							*hl-CursorLineNr*
+CursorLineNr	Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set for the cursor line.
 							*hl-MatchParen*
 MatchParen	The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
 		is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|

runtime/doc/tabpage.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*tabpage.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 31
+*tabpage.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ something else.
 		this is a "safe" command.
 
 :tabc[lose][!] {count}
-		Close tab page {count}.  Fails in the same way as ':tabclose"
+		Close tab page {count}.  Fails in the same way as `:tabclose`
 		above.
 
 							*:tabo* *:tabonly*
@@ -173,10 +173,20 @@ Other commands:
 REORDERING TAB PAGES:
 
 :tabm[ove] [N]						*:tabm* *:tabmove*
+:[N]tabm[ove]
 		Move the current tab page to after tab page N.  Use zero to
 		make the current tab page the first one.  Without N the tab
 		page is made the last one.
 
+:tabm[ove] +[N]
+:tabm[ove] -[N]
+		Move the current tab page N places to the right (with +) or to
+		the left (with -).
+
+Note that although it is possible to move a tab behind the N-th one by using
+:Ntabmove, it is impossible to move it by N places by using :+Ntabmove. For
+clarification what +N means in this context see |[range]|.
+
 
 LOOPING OVER TAB PAGES:
 

runtime/doc/tags

@@ -281,6 +281,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'go-F'	options.txt	/*'go-F'*
 'go-L'	options.txt	/*'go-L'*
 'go-M'	options.txt	/*'go-M'*
+'go-P'	options.txt	/*'go-P'*
 'go-R'	options.txt	/*'go-R'*
 'go-T'	options.txt	/*'go-T'*
 'go-a'	options.txt	/*'go-a'*
@@ -1185,6 +1186,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 +mouse_gpm	various.txt	/*+mouse_gpm*
 +mouse_netterm	various.txt	/*+mouse_netterm*
 +mouse_pterm	various.txt	/*+mouse_pterm*
++mouse_sgr	various.txt	/*+mouse_sgr*
 +mouse_sysmouse	various.txt	/*+mouse_sysmouse*
 +mouse_urxvt	various.txt	/*+mouse_urxvt*
 +mouse_xterm	various.txt	/*+mouse_xterm*
@@ -1835,6 +1837,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :X	editing.txt	/*:X*
 :XMLent	insert.txt	/*:XMLent*
 :XMLns	insert.txt	/*:XMLns*
+:[range]	motion.txt	/*:[range]*
 :\bar	cmdline.txt	/*:\\bar*
 :_!	cmdline.txt	/*:_!*
 :_#	cmdline.txt	/*:_#*
@@ -2617,6 +2620,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :resize	windows.txt	/*:resize*
 :ret	change.txt	/*:ret*
 :retab	change.txt	/*:retab*
+:retab!	change.txt	/*:retab!*
 :retu	eval.txt	/*:retu*
 :return	eval.txt	/*:return*
 :rew	editing.txt	/*:rew*
@@ -3407,6 +3411,7 @@ CmdwinLeave	autocmd.txt	/*CmdwinLeave*
 ColorScheme	autocmd.txt	/*ColorScheme*
 Command-line	cmdline.txt	/*Command-line*
 Command-line-mode	cmdline.txt	/*Command-line-mode*
+CompleteDone	autocmd.txt	/*CompleteDone*
 Contents	quickref.txt	/*Contents*
 Cscope	if_cscop.txt	/*Cscope*
 CursorHold	autocmd.txt	/*CursorHold*
@@ -3630,9 +3635,6 @@ E287	mbyte.txt	/*E287*
 E288	mbyte.txt	/*E288*
 E289	mbyte.txt	/*E289*
 E29	change.txt	/*E29*
-E290	mbyte.txt	/*E290*
-E291	mbyte.txt	/*E291*
-E292	mbyte.txt	/*E292*
 E293	message.txt	/*E293*
 E294	message.txt	/*E294*
 E295	message.txt	/*E295*
@@ -4244,7 +4246,11 @@ E852	gui_x11.txt	/*E852*
 E853	eval.txt	/*E853*
 E854	options.txt	/*E854*
 E855	autocmd.txt	/*E855*
+E858	eval.txt	/*E858*
+E859	eval.txt	/*E859*
 E86	windows.txt	/*E86*
+E860	eval.txt	/*E860*
+E861	eval.txt	/*E861*
 E87	windows.txt	/*E87*
 E88	windows.txt	/*E88*
 E89	message.txt	/*E89*
@@ -4427,6 +4433,7 @@ QuickFixCmdPost	autocmd.txt	/*QuickFixCmdPost*
 QuickFixCmdPost-example	quickfix.txt	/*QuickFixCmdPost-example*
 QuickFixCmdPre	autocmd.txt	/*QuickFixCmdPre*
 Quickfix	quickfix.txt	/*Quickfix*
+QuitPre	autocmd.txt	/*QuitPre*
 R	change.txt	/*R*
 RISC-OS	os_risc.txt	/*RISC-OS*
 RISCOS	os_risc.txt	/*RISCOS*
@@ -4458,6 +4465,11 @@ Syntax	autocmd.txt	/*Syntax*
 T	motion.txt	/*T*
 TCL	if_tcl.txt	/*TCL*
 TERM	starting.txt	/*TERM*
+TOhtml-encoding	syntax.txt	/*TOhtml-encoding*
+TOhtml-encoding-detect	syntax.txt	/*TOhtml-encoding-detect*
+TOhtml-performance	syntax.txt	/*TOhtml-performance*
+TOhtml-uncopyable-text	syntax.txt	/*TOhtml-uncopyable-text*
+TOhtml-wrap-text	syntax.txt	/*TOhtml-wrap-text*
 TSQL	ft_sql.txt	/*TSQL*
 TTpro-telnet	syntax.txt	/*TTpro-telnet*
 Tab	intro.txt	/*Tab*
@@ -4748,6 +4760,7 @@ autocmds-kept	version5.txt	/*autocmds-kept*
 autocommand	autocmd.txt	/*autocommand*
 autocommand-events	autocmd.txt	/*autocommand-events*
 autocommand-pattern	autocmd.txt	/*autocommand-pattern*
+autoformat	change.txt	/*autoformat*
 autoload	eval.txt	/*autoload*
 autoload-functions	eval.txt	/*autoload-functions*
 avoid-hit-enter	version5.txt	/*avoid-hit-enter*
@@ -4995,6 +5008,7 @@ cino-g	indent.txt	/*cino-g*
 cino-h	indent.txt	/*cino-h*
 cino-i	indent.txt	/*cino-i*
 cino-j	indent.txt	/*cino-j*
+cino-k	indent.txt	/*cino-k*
 cino-l	indent.txt	/*cino-l*
 cino-m	indent.txt	/*cino-m*
 cino-n	indent.txt	/*cino-n*
@@ -5011,6 +5025,13 @@ clearmatches()	eval.txt	/*clearmatches()*
 client-server	remote.txt	/*client-server*
 clientserver	remote.txt	/*clientserver*
 clipboard	gui.txt	/*clipboard*
+clipboard-autoselect	options.txt	/*clipboard-autoselect*
+clipboard-autoselectml	options.txt	/*clipboard-autoselectml*
+clipboard-autoselectplus	options.txt	/*clipboard-autoselectplus*
+clipboard-exclude	options.txt	/*clipboard-exclude*
+clipboard-html	options.txt	/*clipboard-html*
+clipboard-unnamed	options.txt	/*clipboard-unnamed*
+clipboard-unnamedplus	options.txt	/*clipboard-unnamedplus*
 cmdarg-variable	eval.txt	/*cmdarg-variable*
 cmdbang-variable	eval.txt	/*cmdbang-variable*
 cmdline-arguments	vi_diff.txt	/*cmdline-arguments*
@@ -5271,6 +5292,7 @@ develop-spell	develop.txt	/*develop-spell*
 develop-spell-suggestions	develop.txt	/*develop-spell-suggestions*
 develop.txt	develop.txt	/*develop.txt*
 development	develop.txt	/*development*
+dgn	motion.txt	/*dgn*
 dh	change.txt	/*dh*
 diB	motion.txt	/*diB*
 diW	motion.txt	/*diW*
@@ -5706,6 +5728,7 @@ ft-quake-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-quake-syntax*
 ft-r-indent	indent.txt	/*ft-r-indent*
 ft-readline-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-readline-syntax*
 ft-rexx-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-rexx-syntax*
+ft-rst-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-rst-syntax*
 ft-ruby-omni	insert.txt	/*ft-ruby-omni*
 ft-ruby-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-ruby-syntax*
 ft-scheme-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-scheme-syntax*
@@ -5814,6 +5837,27 @@ g:gnat.Project_File	ft_ada.txt	/*g:gnat.Project_File*
 g:gnat.Set_Project_File()	ft_ada.txt	/*g:gnat.Set_Project_File()*
 g:gnat.Tags()	ft_ada.txt	/*g:gnat.Tags()*
 g:gnat.Tags_Command	ft_ada.txt	/*g:gnat.Tags_Command*
+g:html_charset_override	syntax.txt	/*g:html_charset_override*
+g:html_diff_one_file	syntax.txt	/*g:html_diff_one_file*
+g:html_dynamic_folds	syntax.txt	/*g:html_dynamic_folds*
+g:html_encoding_override	syntax.txt	/*g:html_encoding_override*
+g:html_end_line	syntax.txt	/*g:html_end_line*
+g:html_expand_tabs	syntax.txt	/*g:html_expand_tabs*
+g:html_hover_unfold	syntax.txt	/*g:html_hover_unfold*
+g:html_ignore_conceal	syntax.txt	/*g:html_ignore_conceal*
+g:html_ignore_folding	syntax.txt	/*g:html_ignore_folding*
+g:html_no_foldcolumn	syntax.txt	/*g:html_no_foldcolumn*
+g:html_no_invalid	syntax.txt	/*g:html_no_invalid*
+g:html_no_pre	syntax.txt	/*g:html_no_pre*
+g:html_no_progress	syntax.txt	/*g:html_no_progress*
+g:html_number_lines	syntax.txt	/*g:html_number_lines*
+g:html_pre_wrap	syntax.txt	/*g:html_pre_wrap*
+g:html_prevent_copy	syntax.txt	/*g:html_prevent_copy*
+g:html_start_line	syntax.txt	/*g:html_start_line*
+g:html_use_css	syntax.txt	/*g:html_use_css*
+g:html_use_encoding	syntax.txt	/*g:html_use_encoding*
+g:html_use_xhtml	syntax.txt	/*g:html_use_xhtml*
+g:html_whole_filler	syntax.txt	/*g:html_whole_filler*
 g:netrw_alto	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_alto*
 g:netrw_altv	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_altv*
 g:netrw_banner	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_banner*
@@ -5829,6 +5873,8 @@ g:netrw_cygwin	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_cygwin*
 g:netrw_dav_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_dav_cmd*
 g:netrw_decompress	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_decompress*
 g:netrw_dirhistmax	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_dirhistmax*
+g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen*
+g:netrw_errorlvl	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_errorlvl*
 g:netrw_fastbrowse	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_fastbrowse*
 g:netrw_fetch_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_fetch_cmd*
 g:netrw_fname_escape	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_fname_escape*
@@ -5836,6 +5882,7 @@ g:netrw_ftp	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp*
 g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject*
 g:netrw_ftp_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_cmd*
 g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd*
+g:netrw_ftp_options	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_options*
 g:netrw_ftp_sizelist_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_sizelist_cmd*
 g:netrw_ftp_timelist_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_timelist_cmd*
 g:netrw_ftpextracmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftpextracmd*
@@ -5850,10 +5897,10 @@ g:netrw_keepdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_keepdir*
 g:netrw_list_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_list_cmd*
 g:netrw_list_hide	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_list_hide*
 g:netrw_liststyle	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_liststyle*
-g:netrw_local_mkdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_local_mkdir*
-g:netrw_local_rmdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_local_rmdir*
 g:netrw_localcopycmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localcopycmd*
+g:netrw_localmkdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localmkdir*
 g:netrw_localmovecmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localmovecmd*
+g:netrw_localrmdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localrmdir*
 g:netrw_maxfilenamelen	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_maxfilenamelen*
 g:netrw_menu	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_menu*
 g:netrw_mkdir_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_mkdir_cmd*
@@ -5902,6 +5949,7 @@ g:tar_readoptions	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_readoptions*
 g:tar_secure	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_secure*
 g:tar_writeoptions	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_writeoptions*
 g:tex_conceal	syntax.txt	/*g:tex_conceal*
+g:tex_isk	syntax.txt	/*g:tex_isk*
 g:var	eval.txt	/*g:var*
 g:vimball_home	pi_vimball.txt	/*g:vimball_home*
 g:vimball_mkdir	pi_vimball.txt	/*g:vimball_mkdir*
@@ -5932,6 +5980,7 @@ gF	editing.txt	/*gF*
 gH	visual.txt	/*gH*
 gI	insert.txt	/*gI*
 gJ	change.txt	/*gJ*
+gN	visual.txt	/*gN*
 gP	change.txt	/*gP*
 gQ	intro.txt	/*gQ*
 gR	change.txt	/*gR*
@@ -6016,6 +6065,7 @@ glvs-options	pi_getscript.txt	/*glvs-options*
 glvs-plugins	pi_getscript.txt	/*glvs-plugins*
 glvs-usage	pi_getscript.txt	/*glvs-usage*
 gm	motion.txt	/*gm*
+gn	visual.txt	/*gn*
 gnat#Insert_Tags_Header()	ft_ada.txt	/*gnat#Insert_Tags_Header()*
 gnat#New()	ft_ada.txt	/*gnat#New()*
 gnat-xref	ft_ada.txt	/*gnat-xref*
@@ -6183,6 +6233,7 @@ hl-Cursor	syntax.txt	/*hl-Cursor*
 hl-CursorColumn	syntax.txt	/*hl-CursorColumn*
 hl-CursorIM	syntax.txt	/*hl-CursorIM*
 hl-CursorLine	syntax.txt	/*hl-CursorLine*
+hl-CursorLineNr	syntax.txt	/*hl-CursorLineNr*
 hl-DiffAdd	syntax.txt	/*hl-DiffAdd*
 hl-DiffChange	syntax.txt	/*hl-DiffChange*
 hl-DiffDelete	syntax.txt	/*hl-DiffDelete*
@@ -6509,6 +6560,13 @@ last-pattern	pattern.txt	/*last-pattern*
 last-position-jump	eval.txt	/*last-position-jump*
 last_buffer_nr()	eval.txt	/*last_buffer_nr()*
 lc_time-variable	eval.txt	/*lc_time-variable*
+lcs-conceal	options.txt	/*lcs-conceal*
+lcs-eol	options.txt	/*lcs-eol*
+lcs-extends	options.txt	/*lcs-extends*
+lcs-nbsp	options.txt	/*lcs-nbsp*
+lcs-precedes	options.txt	/*lcs-precedes*
+lcs-tab	options.txt	/*lcs-tab*
+lcs-trail	options.txt	/*lcs-trail*
 left-right-motions	motion.txt	/*left-right-motions*
 len()	eval.txt	/*len()*
 less	various.txt	/*less*
@@ -6559,11 +6617,18 @@ lpc.vim	syntax.txt	/*lpc.vim*
 lua	if_lua.txt	/*lua*
 lua-buffer	if_lua.txt	/*lua-buffer*
 lua-commands	if_lua.txt	/*lua-commands*
+lua-dict	if_lua.txt	/*lua-dict*
+lua-eval	if_lua.txt	/*lua-eval*
+lua-list	if_lua.txt	/*lua-list*
+lua-luaeval	if_lua.txt	/*lua-luaeval*
 lua-vim	if_lua.txt	/*lua-vim*
 lua-window	if_lua.txt	/*lua-window*
 lua.vim	syntax.txt	/*lua.vim*
+luaeval()	eval.txt	/*luaeval()*
 m	motion.txt	/*m*
 m'	motion.txt	/*m'*
+m<	motion.txt	/*m<*
+m>	motion.txt	/*m>*
 m[	motion.txt	/*m[*
 m]	motion.txt	/*m]*
 m`	motion.txt	/*m`*
@@ -6777,6 +6842,7 @@ netrw-R	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-R*
 netrw-S	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-S*
 netrw-T	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-T*
 netrw-U	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-U*
+netrw-X	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-X*
 netrw-a	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-a*
 netrw-activate	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-activate*
 netrw-bookmark	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-bookmark*
@@ -6935,8 +7001,11 @@ netrw-updir	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-updir*
 netrw-urls	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-urls*
 netrw-userpass	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-userpass*
 netrw-v	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-v*
+netrw-var	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-var*
 netrw-variables	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-variables*
 netrw-vexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-vexplore*
+netrw-windows-netrc	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-windows-netrc*
+netrw-windows-s	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-windows-s*
 netrw-write	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-write*
 netrw-x	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-x*
 netrw-xfer	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-xfer*
@@ -7220,7 +7289,10 @@ pterm-mouse	options.txt	/*pterm-mouse*
 pumvisible()	eval.txt	/*pumvisible()*
 put	change.txt	/*put*
 put-Visual-mode	change.txt	/*put-Visual-mode*
+py3eval()	eval.txt	/*py3eval()*
+pyeval()	eval.txt	/*pyeval()*
 python	if_pyth.txt	/*python*
+python-bindeval	if_pyth.txt	/*python-bindeval*
 python-buffer	if_pyth.txt	/*python-buffer*
 python-buffers	if_pyth.txt	/*python-buffers*
 python-command	if_pyth.txt	/*python-command*
@@ -7232,6 +7304,7 @@ python-eval	if_pyth.txt	/*python-eval*
 python-examples	if_pyth.txt	/*python-examples*
 python-input	if_pyth.txt	/*python-input*
 python-output	if_pyth.txt	/*python-output*
+python-pyeval	if_pyth.txt	/*python-pyeval*
 python-range	if_pyth.txt	/*python-range*
 python-vim	if_pyth.txt	/*python-vim*
 python-window	if_pyth.txt	/*python-window*
@@ -7356,6 +7429,7 @@ rileft.txt	rileft.txt	/*rileft.txt*
 riscos	os_risc.txt	/*riscos*
 rot13	change.txt	/*rot13*
 round()	eval.txt	/*round()*
+rst.vim	syntax.txt	/*rst.vim*
 rsync	pi_netrw.txt	/*rsync*
 ruby	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby*
 ruby-buffer	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby-buffer*
@@ -7407,6 +7481,8 @@ save-file	editing.txt	/*save-file*
 save-settings	starting.txt	/*save-settings*
 scheme.vim	syntax.txt	/*scheme.vim*
 scp	pi_netrw.txt	/*scp*
+screencol()	eval.txt	/*screencol()*
+screenrow()	eval.txt	/*screenrow()*
 script	usr_41.txt	/*script*
 script-here	if_perl.txt	/*script-here*
 script-local	map.txt	/*script-local*
@@ -7471,6 +7547,7 @@ setuid	change.txt	/*setuid*
 setwinvar()	eval.txt	/*setwinvar()*
 sftp	pi_netrw.txt	/*sftp*
 sgml.vim	syntax.txt	/*sgml.vim*
+sgr-mouse	options.txt	/*sgr-mouse*
 sh-awk	syntax.txt	/*sh-awk*
 sh-embed	syntax.txt	/*sh-embed*
 sh.vim	syntax.txt	/*sh.vim*
@@ -7479,6 +7556,7 @@ shell_error-variable	eval.txt	/*shell_error-variable*
 shellescape()	eval.txt	/*shellescape()*
 shift	intro.txt	/*shift*
 shift-left-right	change.txt	/*shift-left-right*
+shiftwidth()	eval.txt	/*shiftwidth()*
 short-name-changed	version4.txt	/*short-name-changed*
 showing-menus	gui.txt	/*showing-menus*
 sign-commands	sign.txt	/*sign-commands*
@@ -8257,11 +8335,13 @@ v_d	change.txt	/*v_d*
 v_g?	change.txt	/*v_g?*
 v_gF	editing.txt	/*v_gF*
 v_gJ	change.txt	/*v_gJ*
+v_gN	visual.txt	/*v_gN*
 v_gV	visual.txt	/*v_gV*
 v_g]	tagsrch.txt	/*v_g]*
 v_g_CTRL-G	editing.txt	/*v_g_CTRL-G*
 v_g_CTRL-]	tagsrch.txt	/*v_g_CTRL-]*
 v_gf	editing.txt	/*v_gf*
+v_gn	visual.txt	/*v_gn*
 v_gq	change.txt	/*v_gq*
 v_gv	visual.txt	/*v_gv*
 v_gw	change.txt	/*v_gw*
@@ -8424,6 +8504,7 @@ vt100-cursor-keys	term.txt	/*vt100-cursor-keys*
 vt100-function-keys	term.txt	/*vt100-function-keys*
 w	motion.txt	/*w*
 w32-clientserver	remote.txt	/*w32-clientserver*
+w32-xpm-support	gui_w32.txt	/*w32-xpm-support*
 w:current_syntax	syntax.txt	/*w:current_syntax*
 w:quickfix_title	quickfix.txt	/*w:quickfix_title*
 w:var	eval.txt	/*w:var*

runtime/doc/todo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Feb 22
+*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Dec 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -34,126 +34,219 @@ not be repeated below, unless there is extra information.
 							*known-bugs*
 -------------------- Known bugs and current work -----------------------
 
+On external command get the message: 
+     SIGCHLD handler called (some thread has SIGCHLD unblocked)
+From MzScheme
+
 Go through more coverity reports.
 
 Discussion about canonicalization of Hebrew. (Ron Aaron, 2011 April 10)
 
-Stack trace of crash: http://vpaste.net/GBt9S
-(Alexandre Provencio)
-
-Once syntax and other runtime files have been fixed: add "set cp" to
-check.vim.  Use a function to run both with 'cp' and 'nocp'.
-
-Undo broken when pasting close to the last line. (Andrey Radev, 2012 Feb 14)
-Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2012 Feb 14.
+Checking runtime scripts: Thilo Six, 2012 Jun 6.
 
 GTK: problem with 'L' in 'guioptions' changing the window width.
 (Aaron Cornelius, 2012 Feb 6)
 
+Javascript file where indent gets stuck on: GalaxyMaster, 2012 May 3.
+
+The CompleteDone autocommand needs some info passed to it:
+- The word that was selected (empty if abandoned complete)
+- Type of completion: tag, omnifunc, user func.
+
+Patch for matchit.vim. (Mike Morearty, 2012 Nov 28)
+
+Patch to fix that the QuitPre autocommand clears the quitmore flag. (Techlive
+Zheng, 2012 Nov 28)
+
+":gundo" command: global undo.  Undoes changes spread over multiple files in
+the order they were made.  Also ":gredo".  Both with a count.  Useful when
+tests fail after making changes and you forgot in which files.
+
+Patch to make updating tabline faster. (Arseny Kapoulkine, 2012 Oct 3)
+Also remove the "rc" variable.
+
+Patch to make "- register not always used. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Nov 28)
+
+Crash with vimdiff. (Don Cruickshank, 2012 Sep 23)
+
+Patch to support subdirectories for help files. (Charles Campbell, 2012 Nov
+21)
+
+Patch for mzscheme.  (Sergey Khorev, 2012 Nov 19)
+What about ignoring SEGV?
+
+Win32: use 'guifontwide' for IME composition. (Taro Muraoka, 2012 Sep 30)
+Update Oct 2.
+
+Patch to fix :s command with confirm and typing "a". (Christian Brabandt, 2012
+Oct 28)
+
+/[^\n] does match at a line break.  Expected to do the same as /.
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2012 Dec 1.
+Test files in archive in another message.
+
+Patch to make multibyte input work on Win32 console when codepage differs from
+'encoding'. (Ken Takata, 2012 Sep 29)
+
+It's possible to defined an input() function that overrides the built-in one.
+(ZyX, 2012 Sep 28)
+
 Win32: When a directory name contains an exclamation mark, completion doesn't
 complete the contents of the directory.  No escaping for the "!"? (Jan
 Stocker, 2012 Jan 5)
 
-Patch to speed up ga_grow(). (Dominique Pelle, 2012 Feb 13)
+Problem parsing expression with function(). (Andy Wokula, 2012 Nov 22)
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, Nov 22.  Tests in another patch, Nov 23.
 
-Patch for "tab drop hoge" moving current window. (Higashi, 2012 Jan 31)
-":tab drop buffer.c" always opens a new tab, also if buffer.c is already in an
-open window. (Herb Sitz, 2011 Nov 17)
-":tab drop filename" doesn't work nicely when "filename" is open in a window
-in another tab. (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 Feb 13)
+Problem caused by patch 7.3.638: window->open does not update window
+correctly. Issue 91.
 
-Patch to make InsertCharPre work better. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2011 Oct 21)
+Do allow real tags above the !_TAG entries. Undo older patch. Issue 90.
 
-Patch to fix closed folds with "loadview". (Xavier de Gaye, 2011 Nov 25)
+Patch to support 'u' in interactive substitute. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Sep
+28)  With tests: Oct 9.
+
+Patch for IME handling, adds 'imactivatefunc' and 'imstatusfunc' option.
+(Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2012 Aug 16)
+Patch to improve IME handling. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2012 Jul 18)
+
+Issue 54: document behavior of -complete, also expands arg.
+
+New syntax files for apt. (quidame, 2012 Sep 21)
+
+'ff' is wrong for one-line file without EOL. (Issue 77)
+
+Patch for if_lua. (Luis Carvalho, 2012 Aug 26, update Aug 29, another Aug 30,
+then Sep 1, reminder Oct 14)
+
+Issue 72: 'autochdir' causes problems for :vimgrep.
+
+Undo problem: line not removed as expected when using setline() from Insert
+mode. (Israel Chauca, 2010 May 13, more in second msg)
+Break undo when CTRL-R = changes the text?  Or save more lines?
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2012 Nov 16.
+
+In the ATTENTION message about an existing swap file, mention the name of the
+process that is running.  It might actually be some other program, e.g. after
+a reboot.
+
+MS-Windows: Crash opening very long file name starting with "\\".
+(Christian Brock, 2012 Jun 29)
+
+It's probably a good idea to make a negative value for 'sts' use the value of
+'sw'.  Patch by So8res, Oct 3 2012
+
+Syntax update problem in one buffer opened in two windows, bottom window is
+not correctly updated. (Paul Harris, 2012 Feb 27)
+
+Patch to add assignments in cscope. (Uli Meis, Estabrooks, 2012 Sep 1)
+Alternate patch by Gary Johnson, Sep 4.
 
 Patch to add getsid(). (Tyru, 2011 Oct 2)  Do we want this?  Update Oct 4.
 Or use expand('<sid>')?
 
-Patch for glob() returning a list. (Christian Brabandt, 2011 Aug 24, second
-one)
+Patch for :tabcloseleft, after closing a tab go to left tab. (William Bowers,
+2012 Aug 4)
 
-Win32: When the taskbar is at the top of the screen creating the tabbar causes
-the window to move unnecessarily. (William E. Skeith III, 2012 Jan 12)
-Patch: 2012 Jan 13  Needs more work (2012 Feb 2)
+Patch with suggestions for starting.txt. (Tony Mechelynck, 2012 Oct 24)
+But use Gnome instead of GTK?
 
-Patch to highlight cursor line number. (Howard Buchholz (lhb), 2011 Oct 18)
+Should be possible to enable/disable matchparen per window or buffer.
+Add a check for b:no_match_paren in Highlight_matching_Pair() (Marcin
+Szamotulski, 2012 Nov 8)
+
+Crash in autocmd that unloads buffers in a BufUnload event. (Andrew Pimlott,
+2012 Aug 11)  Disallow :new when BufUnload is being handled?
+
+MS-Windows ACL support doesn't work well.  Patch from Ken Takata, 2012 Aug 29.
+Update Aug 31.
+
+MS-Windows resizing problems:
+- Windows window on screen positioning: Patch by Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2012 Jun
+  20.  Uses getWindowRect() instead of GetWindowPlacement()
+- Win32: When the taskbar is at the top of the screen creating the tabbar
+  causes the window to move unnecessarily. (William E. Skeith III, 2012 Jan
+  12) Patch: 2012 Jan 13  Needs more work (2012 Feb 2)
+
+'iminsert' global value set when using ":setlocal iminsert"? (Wu, 2012 Jun 23)
+
+Help for b:undo_indent'. (Thilo Six, 2012 May 28)
+Also question if examples are correct.
+
+It should be possible to make globpath() return a list instead of a string,
+like with glob(). (Greg Novack, 2012 Nov 2)
+
+The input map for CTRL-O in mswin.vim causes problems after CTRL-X CTRL-O.
+Suggestion for another map. (Philip Mat, 2012 Jun 18)
+But use "gi" instead of "a".  Or use CTRL-\ CTRL-O.
+
+Patch to support user name completion on MS-Windows. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2012
+Aug 16)
+
+Have an option for spell checking to not mark any Chinese, Japanese or other
+double-width characters as error.  Or perhaps all characters above 256.
+(Bill Sun)  Helps a lot for mixed Asian and latin text.
+
+When there are no command line arguments ":next" and ":argu" give E163, which
+is confusing.  Should say "the argument list is empty".
 
 URXVT:
-- will get stuck if byte sequence does not containe expected semicolon.
-- Patch for urxvt mouse support after shell command. (Issue 31)
+- will get stuck if byte sequence does not contain the expected semicolon.
 - Use urxvt mouse support also in xterm.  Explanations:
   http://www.midnight-commander.org/ticket/2662
 
-Patch for using QuickFixCmdPre for more commands. (Marcin Szamotulski, 2012
-Feb 1, update Feb 2)
+MS-Windows: test 17 fails.  Analysis by Michael Soyka, 2012 Nov 5.
 
-Patch for pasting in the Ex command line is slow. (Dominique Pelle, 2012 Feb
-19)
+Patch to add tests for if_xcmdsrv.c., Jul 8, need some more work. (Brian Burns)
+New tests Jul 13.   Update Jul 17.  Discussion Jul 18.
 
 When running Vim in silent ex mode, an existing swapfile causes Vim to wait
 for a user action without a prompt. (Maarten Billemont, 2012 Feb 3)
 Do give the prompt? Quit with an error?
 
-When exiting with unsaved changes, selecting an existing file in the file
-dialog, there is no dialog to ask whether the existing file should be
-overwritten. (Felipe G. Nievinski, 2011 Dec 22)
+Patch for 'backupcopy' default behavior for symlinks on Windows. (David Pope,
+2012 Mar 21, update Mar 31)
+With fix for memory leak: Ken Takata, 2012 Aug 24
+Another update Sep 24.
 
-Patch for improved ":qa" behavior. (Hirohito Higashi, 2012 Feb 18)
+Patch to list user digraphs. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Apr 14)
 
-Recognize objcpp. (Austin Ziegler, 2012 Feb 15)
+Patch for input method status. (Hirohito Higashi, 2012 Apr 18)
 
-7   Setting an option always sets "w_set_curswant", while this is only
-    required for a few options.  Only do it for those options to avoid the
-    side effect.
-Patch by Kana Natsuno, 2011 Nov 12.
-
-Patch to fix member confusion in Lua interface. (Taro Muraoka, 2012 Jan 8)
-Update Jan 9.
-Carvalho merged the patch:  New version 2012 Jan 19.
-
-Patch for option in 'cino' to specify more indent for continued conditions.
-(Lech Lorens, 2011 Nov 27)
-Isn't this already possible?  Update 2012 Feb 15.
-
-Patch for using objcpp file type for headers files. Issue 44.
-
-Docs fix for v:register. (Ingo Karkat, 2011 Sep 26, 27)
-v:register doesn't work exactly as expected. (David Fishburn, 2011 Sep 20)
-
-Patch for: vimgrep fails when 'autochdir' is set. (Ben Fritz, 2012 Feb 4)
-
-Patch for: (Christian Brabandt, 2011 Aug 22)
--   Make it possible to enter "r<C-E>" and "r<C-Y>" (get character from line
-    below/above).
-
-Patch for: (Christian Brabandt, 2011 Aug 24, updated patch)
-8   ":sign unplace * file={filename}" should work.  Also: ":sign unplace *
-    buffer={bufnr}".  So one can remove all signs for one file/buffer.
-
-Patch to add "onselected" callback for completion. (Taro Muraoka, 2011 Sep 24)
-Another for CompleteFuncOk. (Florian Klein, 2012 Jan 31)
-Name it "CompleteFuncDone".
-
-Patch for Make_mvc.mak and Make_ming.mak for Ruby support. (Yasuhiro
-Matsumoto, 2012 Jan 30)
-
-Use a count before "v" and "V" to select that many characters or lines?
-(Kikyous)
+Patch to print the result of a :python command. (Maxim Philippov
+<philippovmi@gmail.com>, 2012 Aug 16)  Update Aug 17.
 
 Problem with winfixheight and resizing. (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2011 Sep 17)
 Patch Sep 18.
 
+Patch for IME problems. Remove hacking code for old IM. (Yukihiro Nakadaira,
+2012 Jul 20)
+
 Patch for has('unnamedplus') docs. (Tony Mechelynck, 2011 Sep 27)
 And one for gui_x11.txt.
 
+-   Patch for 'breakindent' option: repeat indent for wrapped line. (Vaclav
+    Smilauer, 2004 Sep 13, fix Oct 31, update 2007 May 30)
+    Version for latest MacVim: Tobia Conforto, 2009 Nov 23
+    More recent version: https://retracile.net/wiki/VimBreakIndent
+    Posted to vim-dev by Taylor Hedberg, 2011 Nov 25
+
+Problem with starting Visual block mode with :norm when 'virtualedit' is set.
+(David glts, 2012 Jun 5)
+
 ":cd" doesn't work when current directory path contains "**".
 finddir() has the same problem.  (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2012 Jan 10)
 Requires a rewrite of the file_file_in_path code.
 
 Problem with l: dictionary being locked in a function. (ZyX, 2011 Jul 21)
 
+Should use has("browsefilter") in ftplugins.  Requires patch 7.3.593.
+
 Issue 48: foldopen error can't be caught by try/catch
 
+"dg_" deletes including the last character, "d:normal! g_" doesn't.
+(Nomen Nescio, 2012 Jun 27)
+
 Patch to sort functions starting with '<' after others.  Omit dict functions,
 they can't be called. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2011 Oct 11)
 
@@ -162,6 +255,11 @@ Patch to pass list to or(), and() and xor(). (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2012 Feb 8)
 Patch to improve "it" and "at" text object matching. (Christian Brabandt, 2011
 Nov 20)
 
+Patch to improve GUI find/replace dialog. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 May 26)
+Update Jun 2.
+
+Patch to add ":py3do". (Lilydjwg, 2012 Apr 7)
+
 `[ moves to character after insert, instead of the last inserted character.
 (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2011 Dec 9)
 
@@ -173,9 +271,6 @@ Updated syntax file for ssh_config, maintainer doesn't respond.
 BufWinLeave triggers too late when quitting last window in a tab page. (Lech
 Lorens, 2012 Feb 21)
 
-"fC" doesn't position the cursor correctly when there are concealed
-characters.  Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2011 Oct 11)
-
 Patch for 'transparency' option. (Sergiu Dotenco, 2011 Sep 17)
 Only for MS-Windows.  No documentation.  Do we want this?
 
@@ -184,6 +279,11 @@ Patch to support cursor shape in Cygwin console. (Ben bgold, 2011 Dec 27)
 Patch to support UTF-8 for Hangul. (Shawn Y.H. Kim, 2011 May 1)
 Needs more work.  Pinged 2012 Jan 4.
 
+Issue 64: when 'incsearch' is on can't paste LF on command line.
+
+On MS-Windows a temp dir with a & init causes system() to fail. (Ben Fritz,
+2012 Jun 19)
+
 'cursorline' is displayed too short when there are concealed characters and
 'list' is set.  (Dennis Preiser)
 Patch 7.3.116 was the wrong solution.
@@ -197,6 +297,15 @@ Syntax region with 'concealends' and a 'cchar' value, 'conceallevel' set to 2,
 only one of the two ends gets the cchar displayed. (Brett Stahlman, 2010 Aug
 21, Ben Fritz, 2010 Sep 14)
 
+'cursorline' is drawn incorrectly in diff mode. Patch by Christian Brabandt,
+2012 Apr 2.
+
+'cursorline' works on a text line only.  Add 'cursorscreenline' for
+highlighting the screen line. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Mar 31)
+
+Win32: Does building a 64 bit version with VC9 give warnings for int
+conversions? (Mike Williams)
+
 Win32: Patch to use task dialogs when available. (Sergiu Dotenco, 2011 Sep 17)
 New feature, requires testing.  Made some remarks.
 
@@ -206,6 +315,9 @@ Sep 17)  Asked for feedback from others.
 Win32: Cannot cd into a directory that starts with a space. (Andy Wokula, 2012
 Jan 19)
 
+Win32: default for 'backupcopy' is wrong for a symbolic link. (mklink one
+two). (Benjamin Fritz, 2012 Mar 15)
+
 Need to escape $HOME on Windows?  (ZyX, 2011 Jul 21)
 
 "2" in 'formatopions' not working in comments. (Christian Corneliussen, 2011
@@ -213,6 +325,9 @@ Oct 26)
 
 Bug in repeating Visual "u". (Lawrence Kesteloot, 2010 Dec 20)
 
+Using "p" in Visual mode while specifying the small delete register "-
+overwrites the register before it is put. (Marcin Szamotulski, 2012 Nov 23)
+
 With "unamedplus" in 'clipboard' pasting in Visual mode causes error for empty
 register. (Michael Seiwald, 2011 Jun 28)  I can't reproduce it.
 
@@ -236,9 +351,6 @@ Christoph Ebersbach, 2011 Jul 3)
 
 Windows keys not set properly on Windows 7?  (cncyber, 2010 Aug 26)
 
-This line hangs Vim, because of syntax HL:
-call append(line, "INFO  ....12....18....24....30....36....42....48....54....60....66....72....78%$")
-
 When using a Vim server, a # in the path causes an error message.
 (Jeff Lanzarotta, 2011 Feb 17)
 
@@ -251,6 +363,10 @@ Bug: Windows 7 64 bit system freezes  when 'clipboard' set to "unnamed" and
 doing ":g/test/d".  Putting every delete on the clipboard? (Robert Chan, 2011
 Jun 17)
 
+When there is a ">" in a line that "gq" wraps to the start of the next line,
+then the following line will pick it up as a leader.  Should get the leader
+from the first line, not a wrapped line. (Matt Ackeret, 2012 Feb 27)
+
 Using ":break" or something else that stops executing commands inside a
 ":finally" does not rethrow a previously uncaught exception. (ZyX, 2010 Oct
 15)
@@ -259,6 +375,10 @@ Vim using lots of memory when joining lines. (John Little, 2010 Dec 3)
 
 Changes to manpage plugin. (Elias Toivanen, 2011 Jul 25)
 
+Patch to make "z=" work when 'spell' is off.  Does this have nasty side
+effects?  (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Aug 5)
+Would also need to do this for spellbadword() and spellsuggest().
+
 On 64 bit MS-Windows "long" is only 32 bits, but we sometimes need to store a
 64 bits value.  Change all number options to use nropt_T and define it to the
 right type.
@@ -283,9 +403,6 @@ mapping, how to restore the script ID?
 Bug in try/catch: return with invalid compare throws error that isn't caught.
 (ZyX, 2011 Jan 26)
 
-Highlighting stops working after changing it many times.  Script to reproduce
-it: Pablo Contreras, 2010 Oct 12  Windows XP and 7.  Font is never freed?
-
 When setting a local option value from the global value, add a script ID that
 indicates this, so that ":verbose set" can give a hint.  Check with options in
 the help file.
@@ -364,7 +481,7 @@ Searching mixed with Visual mode doesn't redraw properly. (James Vega, 2010 Nov
 
 New esperanto spell file can't be processed. (Dominique Pelle, 2011 Jan 30)
 - move compflags to separate growarray?
-- instead of a regexp use a hashtable.  Expand '?', '*", '+'.  What would be
+- instead of a regexp use a hashtable.  Expand '?', '*', '+'.  What would be
   the maximum repeat for * and +?
 
 "L'Italie" noted as a spell error at start of the sentence. (Dominique Pelle,
@@ -376,6 +493,7 @@ When putting text in the cut buffer (when exiting) and conversion doesn't work
 properly, Prepend "ENC==={value of 'enc'}:" to the text and don't convert?
 Then it should at least work from Vim to Vim and in other applications it's
 clear why it doesn't work.
+Experimental patch by Christian Brabandt, 2012 Apr 19.
 
 Editing a file with a ^M with 'ff' set to "mac", opening a help file, then the
 ^M is displayed as ^J sometimes.  Getting 'ff' value from wrong window/buffer?
@@ -511,12 +629,19 @@ Add local time at start of --startuptime output.
 Requires configure check for localtime().
 Use format year-month-day hr:min:sec.
 
+Patch to add "combine" to :syntax, combines highlight attributes. (Nate
+Soares, 2012 Dec 3)
+
+Patch to make ":hi link" also take arguments. (Nate Soares, 2012 Dec 4)
+
 Shell not recognized properly if it ends in "csh -f". (James Vega, 2009 Nov 3)
 Find tail?  Might have a / in argument.  Find space?  Might have space in
 path.
 
 Test 51 fails when language set to German. (Marco, 2011 Jan 9)
-Dominique can't reproduc it.
+Dominique can't reproduce it.
+
+'ambiwidth' should be global-local.
 
 ":function f(x) keepjumps" creates a function where every command is executed
 like it has ":keepjumps" before it.
@@ -547,10 +672,6 @@ Problem with stop directory in findfile(). (Adam Simpkins, 2009 Aug 26)
 Using ']' as the end of a range in a pattern requires double escaping:
      /[@-\\]]  (Andy Wokula, 2011 Jun 28)
 
-Undo problem: line not removed as expected when using setline() from Insert
-mode. (Israel Chauca, 2010 May 13, more in second msg)
-Break undo when CTRL-R = changes the text?  Or save more lines?
-
 Slow combination of folding and PHP syntax highlighting.  Script to reproduce
 it.  Caused by "syntax sync fromstart" in combination with patch 7.2.274.
 (Christian Brabandt, 2010 May 27)
@@ -569,9 +690,6 @@ When a:base in 'completefunc' starts with a number it's passed as a number,
 not a string. (Sean Ma)  Need to add flag to call_func_retlist() to force a
 string value.
 
-":e ~br<Tab>" does not complete to ":e /home/bram/".  Would need to use
-getpwent() to find all the matches.
-
 Invalid read error in Farsi mode. (Dominique Pelle, 2009 Aug 2)
 
 For running gvim on an USB stick: avoid the OLE registration.  Use a command
@@ -656,10 +774,6 @@ Now that colnr_T is int instead of unsigned, more type casts can be removed.
 'delcombine' does not work for the command line. (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 Jul
 20)
 
-Unwanted file name escaping: ":echo input('file:' , '', 'file')"
-And use file name completion on a file with spaces. (Frederic Hardy, 2009 Mar
-23)
-
 Don't load macmap.vim on startup, turn it into a plugin. (Ron Aaron,
 2009 Apr 7)  Reminder Apr 14.
 
@@ -699,10 +813,6 @@ Support a 'systemencoding' option (for Unix).  It specifies the encoding of
 file names. (Kikuchan, 2010 Oct 5).  Useful on a latin1 or double-byte Asian
 system when 'encoding' is "utf-8".
 
-Win32: A --remote command that has a directory name starting with a ( doesn't
-work, the backslash is removed, assuming that it escapes the (. (Valery
-Kondakoff, 2009 May 13)
-
 Win32 GUI: Changing manifest helps for dpi changes (Joe Castro, 2009 Mar 27)
 
 Win32 GUI: last message from startup doesn't show up when there is an echoerr
@@ -720,7 +830,7 @@ very high. (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2010 Jul 22, Michael Peeters, 2010 Jul 22)
 Directory wrong in session file, caused by ":lcd" in BufEnter autocommand.
 (Felix Kater, 2009 Mar 3)
 
-Session file generates error upon loading, cause bu --remote-silent-tab.
+Session file generates error upon loading, cause by --remote-silent-tab.
 (7tommm (ytommm) 2010 Nov 24)
 
 Using ~ works OK on 'a' with composing char, but not on 0x0418  with composing
@@ -841,8 +951,6 @@ error message?  Or is this easy to implement?  (Nathan Stratton Treadway, 2008
 Aug 20)  This is in ucs2bytes(), search for 0xBF.  Using the ++bad argument is
 at the other match for 0xBF.
 
-Fix for matchparen HL doesn't work.  beep.
-
 When adding "-complete=file" to a user command this also changes how the
 argument is processed for <f-args>. (Ivan Tishchenko, 2008 Aug 19)
 
@@ -888,6 +996,15 @@ escaping characters where the backslash is not removed later.  Asked Chris for
 an alternate solution, also for src/ex_getln.c.
 This also fails when the file or directory name contains "%". (Thoml, 2008
 July 7)
+Using --remote-silent while the current directory has a # in the name does not
+work, the # needs to be escaped. (Tramblay Bruno, 2012 Sep 15)
+
+When using remote-silent the -R flag is not passed on. (Axel Bender, 2012 May
+31)
+
+Win32: A --remote command that has a directory name starting with a ( doesn't
+work, the backslash is removed, assuming that it escapes the (. (Valery
+Kondakoff, 2009 May 13)
 
 Problem with 'langmap' being used on the rhs of a mapping. (Nikolai Weibull,
 2008 May 14)
@@ -1106,6 +1223,7 @@ Latest version: 2011 May 18
 8   Windows install with NSIS: make it possible to do a silent install, see
     http://nsis.sourceforge.net/Docs/Chapter4.html#4.12
     Version from Guopeng Wen that does this (2010 Dec 27)
+Alternative: MSI installer: https://github.com/petrkle/vim-msi/
 
 Windows installer should install 32-bit version of right-click handler also on
 64-bit systems. (Brian Cunningham, 2011 Dec 28)
@@ -1169,10 +1287,6 @@ pointer in long and seek offset in 64 bit var.
 
 Win32: patch for fullscreen mode. (Liushaolin, 2008 April 17)
 
-Win32: When there is 4 Gbyte of memory mch_avail_mem() doesn't work properly.
-Unfinished patch by Jelle Geerts, 2008 Aug 24.
-Let mch_avail_mem() return Kbyte instead?
-
 Win32: When 'shell' is bash shellescape() doesn't always do the right thing.
 Depends on 'shellslash', 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote', but shellescape()
 only takes 'shellslash' into account.
@@ -1482,6 +1596,9 @@ Win32, NTFS: When editing a specific infostream directly and 'backupcopy' is
 name is something like "c:\path\foo.txt:bar", includes a colon.  (Alex
 Jakushev, 2008 Feb 1)
 
+printf() uses the field width in bytes. Can it be made character width,
+perhaps with a modifier?  What does Posix say?
+
 Small problem displaying diff filler line when opening windows with a script.
 (David Luyer, 2007 Mar 1 ~/Mail/oldmail/mool/in.15872 )
 
@@ -1614,11 +1731,6 @@ Awaiting updated patches:
 7   Completion of network shares, patch by Yasuhiro Matsumoto.
     Update 2004 Sep 6.
     How does this work?  Missing comments.
--   Patch for 'breakindent' option: repeat indent for wrapped line. (Vaclav
-    Smilauer, 2004 Sep 13, fix Oct 31, update 2007 May 30)
-    Version for latest MacVim: Tobia Conforto, 2009 Nov 23
-    More recent version: https://retracile.net/wiki/VimBreakIndent
-    Posted to vim-dev by Taylor Hedberg, 2011 Nov 25
 8   Add a few more command names to the menus.  Patch from Jiri Brezina
     (28 feb 2002).  Will mess the translations...
 7   ATTENTION dialog choices are more logical when "Delete it' appears
@@ -2636,8 +2748,6 @@ Tab pages:
     font, etc.)
 8   Make GUI menu in tab pages line configurable.  Like the popup menu.
 8   balloons for the tab page labels that are shortened to show the full path.
-8   :tabmove +N	 move tab page N pages forward
-8   :tabmove -N	 move tab page N pages backward
 7   :tabdup	 duplicate the tab with all its windows.
 7   Option to put tab line at the left or right?  Need an option to specify
     its width.  It's like a separate window with ":tabs" output.
@@ -2939,6 +3049,8 @@ Syntax highlighting:
     this isn't reset.  Add a special keyword definition for the syntax rules?
     When this is done, use vim.vim syntax highlighting for help file examples,
     but without ":" in 'iskeyword' for syntax.
+    Also need a separate 'iskeyword' for the command line, e.g., in a help
+    window ":e /asdf/asdf/" CTRL-W works different.
 8   Add specific syntax item to match with parens/braces that don't have a
     "%" match.  :syntax nomatch cMatchError (,{,[,),},] [contained]
 8   Highlight the text between two matching parens (e.g., with a grey
@@ -3939,7 +4051,6 @@ Insert mode:
 -   Add option to 'cindent' to set indent for comments outside of {}?
 -   Make a command to line up a comment after a code line with a previous
     comment after a code line.	Can 'cindent' do this automatically?
-7   Add 'j' flag to 'formatoptions': Remove comment leader when joining lines.
 -   When 'cindent'ing a '}', showmatch is done before fixing the indent.  It
     looks better when the indent is fixed before the showmatch. (Webb)
 -   Add option to make indenting work in comments too (for commented-out
@@ -4896,6 +5007,7 @@ Various improvements:
 -   Make it possible for the 'showbreak' to be displayed at the end of the
     line.  Use a comma to separate the part at the end and the start of the
     line?  Highlight the linebreak characters, add flag in 'highlight'.
+    Make 'showbreak' local to a window.
 -   Some string options should be expanded if they have wildcards, e.g.
     'dictionary' when it is "*.h".
 -   Use a specific type for number and boolean options, making it possible to

runtime/doc/uganda.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*uganda.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Aug 07
+*uganda.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Dec 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -238,6 +238,7 @@ Canada:		Contact Kibaale Children's Fund (KCF) in Surrey, Canada.  They
 Holland:	Transfer to the account of "Stichting ICCF Holland" in Lisse.
 		This will allow for tax deduction if you live in Holland.
 			Postbank, nr. 4548774
+			IBAN: NL95 INGB 0004 5487 74
 
 Germany:	It is possible to make donations that allow for a tax return.
 		Check the ICCF web site for the latest information:
@@ -266,7 +267,7 @@ Credit Card:	You can use PayPal to send money with a Credit card.  This is
 Others:		Transfer to one of these accounts if possible:
 		    Postbank, account 4548774
 				Swift code: INGB NL 2A
-				IBAN: NL47 PSTB 0004 5487 74
+				IBAN: NL95 INGB 0004 5487 74
 			under the name "stichting ICCF Holland", Lisse
 		    If that doesn't work:
 		    Rabobank Lisse, account 3765.05.117

runtime/doc/undo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*undo.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 28
+*undo.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Mar 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ detect if an undo file is no longer synchronized with the file it was written
 for (with a hash of the file contents) and ignore it when the file was changed
 after the undo file was written, to prevent corruption.  An undo file is also
 ignored if its owner differs from the owner of the edited file.  Set 'verbose'
-to get a message about that.
+to get a message about that when opening a file.
 
 Undo files are normally saved in the same directory as the file.  This can be
 changed with the 'undodir' option.

runtime/doc/usr_05.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2009 Jun 04
+*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 20
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -49,8 +49,7 @@ For MS-DOS and MS-Windows you can use one of these:
 
 The vimrc file can contain all the commands that you type after a colon.  The
 most simple ones are for setting options.  For example, if you want Vim to
-always start with the 'incsearch' option on, add this line you your vimrc
-file: >
+always start with the 'incsearch' option on, add this line your vimrc file: >
 
 	set incsearch
 

runtime/doc/usr_21.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_21.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Nov 09
+*usr_21.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 02
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ example, use: >
 SESSION HERE, SESSION THERE
 
 The obvious way to use sessions is when working on different projects.
-Suppose you store you session files in the directory "~/.vim".  You are
+Suppose you store your session files in the directory "~/.vim".  You are
 currently working on the "secret" project and have to switch to the "boring"
 project: >
 
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ is saved, using ":mksession!".  This overwrites the previous session.  The
 next time you load the secret session you can continue where you were at this
 point.  And finally you load the new "boring" session.
 
-If you open help windows, split and close various window, and generally mess
+If you open help windows, split and close various windows, and generally mess
 up the window layout, you can go back to the last saved session: >
 
 	:source ~/.vim/boring.vim
@@ -423,10 +423,10 @@ and nine numbered 1 to 9.
 A VIEW WITH A NAME
 
 The second basic way to use views is by storing the view in a file with a name
-you chose.  This view can be loaded while editing another file.  Vim will then
-switch to editing the file specified in the view.  Thus you can use this to
-quickly switch to editing another file, with all its options set as you saved
-them.
+you choose.  This view can be loaded while editing another file.  Vim will
+then switch to editing the file specified in the view.  Thus you can use this
+to quickly switch to editing another file, with all its options set as you
+saved them.
    For example, to save the view of the current file: >
 
 	:mkview ~/.vim/main.vim

runtime/doc/usr_22.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_22.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Feb 21
+*usr_22.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 15
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -326,9 +326,9 @@ shorter to type: >
 
 The output could look like this:
 
-  1 #h	"help.txt"			line 62 ~
-  2 %a+	"usr_21.txt"			line 1 ~
-  3	"usr_toc.txt"			line 1 ~
+  1 #h   "help.txt"			line 62 ~
+  2 %a + "usr_21.txt"			line 1 ~
+  3      "usr_toc.txt"			line 1 ~
 
 The first column contains the buffer number.  You can use this to edit the
 buffer without having to type the name, see below.

runtime/doc/usr_41.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Dec 15
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 13
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -1581,7 +1581,7 @@ Here the comment part will be ignored.  However, Vim will try to unmap
 
 RESTORING THE VIEW
 
-Sometimes you want to make a change and go back to where cursor was.
+Sometimes you want to make a change and go back to where the cursor was.
 Restoring the relative position would also be nice, so that the same line
 appears at the top of the window.
    This example yanks the current line, puts it above the first line in the
@@ -1681,7 +1681,7 @@ in your plugin file!
 HEADER
 
 You will probably add new corrections to the plugin and soon have several
-versions laying around.  And when distributing this file, people will want to
+versions lying around.  And when distributing this file, people will want to
 know who wrote this wonderful plugin and where they can send remarks.
 Therefore, put a header at the top of your plugin: >
 
@@ -1710,6 +1710,7 @@ make the script work for most people.  It is done like this: >
  12	set cpo&vim
  ..
  42	let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+ 43	unlet s:save_cpo
 
 We first store the old value of 'cpoptions' in the s:save_cpo variable.  At
 the end of the plugin this value is restored.
@@ -1956,6 +1957,7 @@ Here is the resulting complete example: >
  40	endif
  41
  42	let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+ 43	unlet s:save_cpo
 
 Line 33 wasn't explained yet.  It applies the new correction to the word under
 the cursor.  The |:normal| command is used to use the new abbreviation.  Note

runtime/doc/various.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 15
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Dec 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -353,74 +353,75 @@ N  *+mouseshape*	|'mouseshape'|
 B  *+mouse_dec*		Unix only: Dec terminal mouse handling |dec-mouse|
 N  *+mouse_gpm*		Unix only: Linux console mouse handling |gpm-mouse|
 B  *+mouse_netterm*	Unix only: netterm mouse handling |netterm-mouse|
-N  *+mouse_pterm*		QNX only: pterm mouse handling |qnx-terminal|
+N  *+mouse_pterm*	QNX only: pterm mouse handling |qnx-terminal|
 N  *+mouse_sysmouse*	Unix only: *BSD console mouse handling |sysmouse|
-N  *+mouse_urxvt*		Unix only: urxvt mouse handling |urxvt-mouse|
-N  *+mouse_xterm*		Unix only: xterm mouse handling |xterm-mouse|
-B  *+multi_byte*		16 and 32 bit characters |multibyte|
+B  *+mouse_sgr*		Unix only: sgr mouse handling |sgr-mouse|
+B  *+mouse_urxvt*	Unix only: urxvt mouse handling |urxvt-mouse|
+N  *+mouse_xterm*	Unix only: xterm mouse handling |xterm-mouse|
+B  *+multi_byte*	16 and 32 bit characters |multibyte|
    *+multi_byte_ime*	Win32 input method for multibyte chars |multibyte-ime|
-N  *+multi_lang*		non-English language support |multi-lang|
+N  *+multi_lang*	non-English language support |multi-lang|
 m  *+mzscheme*		Mzscheme interface |mzscheme|
 m  *+mzscheme/dyn*	Mzscheme interface |mzscheme-dynamic| |/dyn|
 m  *+netbeans_intg*	|netbeans|
-m  *+ole*			Win32 GUI only: |ole-interface|
-N  *+path_extra*		Up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags'
+m  *+ole*		Win32 GUI only: |ole-interface|
+N  *+path_extra*	Up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags'
 m  *+perl*		Perl interface |perl|
 m  *+perl/dyn*		Perl interface |perl-dynamic| |/dyn|
 N  *+persistent_undo*	Persistent undo |undo-persistence|
-   *+postscript*		|:hardcopy| writes a PostScript file
+   *+postscript*	|:hardcopy| writes a PostScript file
 N  *+printer*		|:hardcopy| command
 H  *+profile*		|:profile| command
 m  *+python*		Python 2 interface |python|
-m  *+python/dyn*		Python 2 interface |python-dynamic| |/dyn|
+m  *+python/dyn*	Python 2 interface |python-dynamic| |/dyn|
 m  *+python3*		Python 3 interface |python|
-m  *+python3/dyn*		Python 3 interface |python-dynamic| |/dyn|
+m  *+python3/dyn*	Python 3 interface |python-dynamic| |/dyn|
 N  *+quickfix*		|:make| and |quickfix| commands
 N  *+reltime*		|reltime()| function, 'hlsearch'/'incsearch' timeout,
 			'redrawtime' option
 B  *+rightleft*		Right to left typing |'rightleft'|
 m  *+ruby*		Ruby interface |ruby|
 m  *+ruby/dyn*		Ruby interface |ruby-dynamic| |/dyn|
-N  *+scrollbind*		|'scrollbind'|
+N  *+scrollbind*	|'scrollbind'|
 B  *+signs*		|:sign|
-N  *+smartindent*		|'smartindent'|
+N  *+smartindent*	|'smartindent'|
 m  *+sniff*		SniFF interface |sniff|
-N  *+startuptime*		|--startuptime| argument
-N  *+statusline*		Options 'statusline', 'rulerformat' and special
+N  *+startuptime*	|--startuptime| argument
+N  *+statusline*	Options 'statusline', 'rulerformat' and special
 			formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'
 m  *+sun_workshop*	|workshop|
 N  *+syntax*		Syntax highlighting |syntax|
    *+system()*		Unix only: opposite of |+fork|
-N  *+tag_binary*		binary searching in tags file |tag-binary-search|
+N  *+tag_binary*	binary searching in tags file |tag-binary-search|
 N  *+tag_old_static*	old method for static tags |tag-old-static|
 m  *+tag_any_white*	any white space allowed in tags file |tag-any-white|
-m  *+tcl*			Tcl interface |tcl|
+m  *+tcl*		Tcl interface |tcl|
 m  *+tcl/dyn*		Tcl interface |tcl-dynamic| |/dyn|
    *+terminfo*		uses |terminfo| instead of termcap
 N  *+termresponse*	support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|
-N  *+textobjects*		|text-objects| selection
+N  *+textobjects*	|text-objects| selection
    *+tgetent*		non-Unix only: able to use external termcap
 N  *+title*		Setting the window 'title' and 'icon'
 N  *+toolbar*		|gui-toolbar|
 N  *+user_commands*	User-defined commands. |user-commands|
 N  *+viminfo*		|'viminfo'|
 N  *+vertsplit*		Vertically split windows |:vsplit|
-N  *+virtualedit*		|'virtualedit'|
+N  *+virtualedit*	|'virtualedit'|
 S  *+visual*		Visual mode |Visual-mode|
-N  *+visualextra*		extra Visual mode commands |blockwise-operators|
+N  *+visualextra*	extra Visual mode commands |blockwise-operators|
 N  *+vreplace*		|gR| and |gr|
-N  *+wildignore*		|'wildignore'|
+N  *+wildignore*	|'wildignore'|
 N  *+wildmenu*		|'wildmenu'|
 S  *+windows*		more than one window
-m  *+writebackup*		|'writebackup'| is default on
-m  *+xim*			X input method |xim|
+m  *+writebackup*	|'writebackup'| is default on
+m  *+xim*		X input method |xim|
    *+xfontset*		X fontset support |xfontset|
-m  *+xpm_w32*		Win32 GUI only: pixmap support |:sign-define|
+m  *+xpm_w32*		Win32 GUI only: pixmap support |w32-xpm-support|
    *+xsmp*		XSMP (X session management) support
    *+xsmp_interact*	interactive XSMP (X session management) support
 N  *+xterm_clipboard*	Unix only: xterm clipboard handling
-m  *+xterm_save*		save and restore xterm screen |xterm-screens|
-N  *+X11*			Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
+m  *+xterm_save*	save and restore xterm screen |xterm-screens|
+N  *+X11*		Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
 
 							*/dyn* *E370* *E448*
 			To some of the features "/dyn" is added when the

runtime/doc/version5.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version5.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Dec 17
+*version5.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 Welcome to Vim Version 5.0!
 
 This document lists the differences between Vim 4.x and Vim 5.0.
-Although 5.0 is mentioned here, this is also for version 5.1, 5.2, etc..
+Although 5.0 is mentioned here, this is also for version 5.1, 5.2, etc.
 See |vi_diff.txt| for an overview of differences between Vi and Vim 5.0.
 See |version4.txt| for differences between Vim 3.0 and Vim 4.0.
 
@@ -3888,7 +3888,7 @@ character is typed.  Helps to close a /* */ comment in C. (Webb)
 When expand() has a second argument which is non-zero, don't use 'suffixes'
 and 'wildignore', return all matches.
 
-'O' flag in 'cpoptions: When not included, Vim will not overwrite a file, if
+'O' flag in 'cpoptions' When not included, Vim will not overwrite a file, if
 it didn't exist when editing started but it does exist when the buffer is
 written to the file.  The file must have been created outside of Vim, possibly
 without the user knowing it.  When this is detected after a shell command,
@@ -4499,7 +4499,7 @@ Could not get all windows back when using a smaller terminal screen.  Didn't
 restore all windows when "winsize" was not in 'sessionoptions'. (Webb)
 
 Command line completion for ":buffer" depended on 'ignorecase' for Unix, but
-not for DOS et al..  Now don't use 'ignorecase', but let it depend on whether
+not for DOS et al.  Now don't use 'ignorecase', but let it depend on whether
 file names are case sensitive or not (like when expanding file names).
 
 Win32 GUI: (Negri)

runtime/doc/version6.txt

@@ -2452,7 +2452,7 @@ differently.
 
 ":n *.c" ":cd .." ":n" didn't use the original directory of the file.  Vi only
 does it for the current file (looks like a bug).  Now remember the buffer used
-for the entry in the argument list and use it's name (adjusted when doing
+for the entry in the argument list and use its name (adjusted when doing
 ":cd"), unless it's deleted.
 
 When inserting a special key as its name ("<F8>" as four characters) after
@@ -3675,7 +3675,7 @@ When double clicking on the first character of a word while 'selection' is
 
 
 Patch 6.0.001
-Problem:    Loading the sh.vim syntax file causes error messages . (Corinna
+Problem:    Loading the sh.vim syntax file causes error messages. (Corinna
 	    Vinschen)
 Solution:   Add an "if". (Charles Campbell)
 Files:	    runtime/syntax/sh.vim
@@ -9091,7 +9091,7 @@ Files:	    src/Make_w16.mak, src/testdir/Make_dos.mak
 Patch 6.1.402
 Problem:    When evaluating a function name with curly braces, an error
 	    is not handled consistently.
-Solution:   Accept the result of an curly braces expression when an
+Solution:   Accept the result of a curly braces expression when an
 	    error was encountered.  Skip evaluating an expression in curly
 	    braces when skipping.  (Servatius Brandt)
 Files:	    src/eval.c

runtime/doc/version7.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version7.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Nov 03
+*version7.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -3587,7 +3587,7 @@ Files:	    src/eval.c, src/getchar.c, src/globals.h, src/main.c
 
 Patch 7.0.085
 Problem:    When doing "make test" the viminfo file is modified.
-Solution:   Use another viminfo file after setting 'compatible.
+Solution:   Use another viminfo file after setting 'compatible'.
 Files:	    src/testdir/test56.in
 
 Patch 7.0.086
@@ -7314,8 +7314,6 @@ Command line completion for :lmap and :lunmap.
 
 Support syntax and filetype completion for user commands. (Christian Brabandt)
 
-Add completion for ":ownsyntax" and improve completion for ":filetype".
-
 Avoid use of the GTK main_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
 (James Vega)
 
@@ -9072,7 +9070,7 @@ Patch 7.2.280
 Problem:    A redraw in a custom statusline with %! may cause a crash.
 	    (Yukihiro Nakadaira)
 Solution:   Make a copy of 'statusline'.  Also fix typo in function name
-	    redraw_custum_statusline. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
+	    redraw_custom_statusline. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
 Files:	    src/screen.c
 
 Patch 7.2.281

runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*vi_diff.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Aug 29
+*vi_diff.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Syntax highlighting.					|:syntax|
 
 Spell checking.						|spell|
 	When the 'spell' option is set Vim will highlight spelling mistakes.
-	About 40 languages are currently supported, selected with the
+	About 50 languages are currently supported, selected with the
 	'spelllang' option.  In source code only comments and strings are
 	checked for spelling.
 
@@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ You can backspace, CTRL-U and CTRL-W over line breaks if the 'backspace' (bs)
 option includes "eol".  You can backspace over the start of insert if the
 'backspace' option includes "start".
 
-When the 'paste' option is set, a few option are reset and mapping in insert
+When the 'paste' option is set, a few options are reset and mapping in insert
 mode and abbreviation are disabled.  This allows for pasting text in windowing
 systems without unexpected results.  When the 'paste' option is reset, the old
 option values are restored.

runtime/doc/vim-de.1

@@ -0,0 +1,478 @@
+.\"*******************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" This file was generated with po4a. Translate the source file.
+.\"
+.\"*******************************************************************
+.\" Translated by bw1 (2008) and Florian Rehnisch <fm-r@gmx.de> (2012)
+.\" Kudos to the folks on vim-dev and debian-l10n-german
+.TH VIM 1 "2006 Apr 11"  
+.SH BEZEICHNUNG
+vim \- Vi IMproved, ein Text\-Editor f<>r Programmierer
+.SH <EFBFBD>BERSICHT
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] [Datei ...]
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-t Tag
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-q [Fehlerdatei]
+.PP
+.br
+\fBex\fP
+.br
+\fBview\fP
+.br
+\fBgvim\fP \fBgview\fP \fBevim\fP \fBeview\fP
+.br
+\fBrvim\fP \fBrview\fP \fBrgvim\fP \fBrgview\fP
+.SH BESCHREIBUNG
+\fBVim\fP ist ein Text\-Editor, der aufw<66>rtskompatibel zu Vi ist. Er kann
+verwendet werden, um alle Arten von Klartext zu bearbeiten. Er ist besonders
+n<EFBFBD>tzlich, um Programme zu bearbeiten.
+.PP
+Vim hat einige Erweiterungen gegen<65>ber Vi, z.B.: R<>ckg<6B>ngigmachen in
+mehreren Schritten, mehrere Fenster und Puffer, Syntax\-Hervorhebung,
+Bearbeiten der Befehlszeile, Dateinamenerg<72>nzung, eingebaute Hilfe, visuelle
+Auswahl, usw. ... Siehe <20>:help vi_diff.txt<78> f<>r eine <20>bersicht der
+Unterschiede zwischen \fBVim\fP und Vi.
+.PP
+Im laufenden \fBVim\fP kann mit dem Befehl <20>:help<6C> viel Hilfe durch das
+eingebaute Hilfesystem erlangt werden. Siehe den Abschnitt EINGEBAUTE HILFE
+weiter unten.
+.PP
+Meistens wird \fBVim\fP zum Editieren einer einzigen Datei mit dem folgende
+Befehl gestartet:
+.PP
+  vim Datei
+.PP
+Allgemeiner betrachtet, wird \fBVim\fP folgenderma<6D>en gestartet:
+.PP
+  vim [Optionen] [Dateiliste]
+.PP
+Bei einer fehlenden Dateiliste startet der Editor mit einem leeren
+Puffer. Andernfalls werden nach den folgenden vier M<>glichkeiten eine oder
+mehrere Dateien bearbeitet:
+.TP  12
+Datei ...
+Eine Liste von Dateinamen. Die erste Datei wird in den Puffer geladen und
+zur aktuellen. Der Cursor wird auf der ersten Zeile des Puffers
+platziert. Zu den anderen Dateien kann mit dem Befehl <20>:next<78> gelangt
+werden. Falls einer der Dateinamen mit einem Bindestrich beginnt, stellen
+Sie der Dateiliste <20>\-\-<EFBFBD> voran.
+.TP 
+\-
+Die zu bearbeitende Datei wird von der Standardeingabe gelesen. Befehle
+werden von der Standardfehlerausgabe gelesen, die ein Text\-Terminal sein
+sollte.
+.TP 
+\-t {Tag}
+Die zu editierende Datei und die anf<6E>ngliche Cursor\-Position h<>ngen von
+einem <20>Tag<61> ab, einer Art Sprungmarke. {Tag} wird in der Tag\-Datei
+nachgeschlagen, die zugeh<65>rige Datei wird zur aktuellen und der zugeh<65>rige
+Befehl wird ausgef<65>hrt. Dies wird meistens f<>r Programme in der Sprache <20>C<EFBFBD>
+benutzt, wobei {Tag} ein Funktionsname sein k<>nnte. Die Wirkung dieses
+Befehls ist, dass die Datei, die die Funktion enth<74>lt, als aktuelle im
+Editor ge<67>ffnet und angezeigt wird und der Cursor auf dem Beginn der
+Funktion positioniert wird. Siehe <20>:help tag\-commands<EFBFBD>.
+.TP 
+\-q [Fehlerdatei]
+Startet im QuickFix\-Modus. Die Datei [Fehlerdatei] wird gelesen und der
+erste Fehler wird angezeigt. Falls [Fehlerdatei] ausgelassen wird, wird der
+Dateiname aus der Option 'errorfile' verwendet (bei AmigaOS ist dies
+vorgabem<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>ig <20>AztecC.Err<72>, sowie "errors.err<72> bei anderen). Weitere Fehler
+k<EFBFBD>nnen mit dem <20>:cn<63>\-Befehl angesprungen werden. Siehe ":help quickfix<69>.
+.PP
+\fBVim\fP reagiert unterschiedlich auf den Namen, der verwendet wird, um Vim zu
+starten (die ausf<73>hrbare Datei kann dieselbe sein).
+.TP  10
+vim
+der <20>normale<6C> Weg, alles ist standardm<64><6D>ig
+.TP 
+ex
+Startet im Ex\-Modus. Mit dem Befehl <20>:vi<76> gelangt man in den normalen
+Modus. Funktioniert auch mit dem Argument <20>\-e<EFBFBD>.
+.TP 
+view
+Startet im Nur\-Lesen\-Modus. Die Datei wird vor dem <20>berschreiben
+gesch<EFBFBD>tzt. Dasselbe wird mit dem Parameter <20>\-R<EFBFBD> erreicht.
+.TP 
+gvim gview
+Die grafische Version: <20>ffnet ein neues Fenster. Dasselbe wird mit dem
+Parameter <20>\-g<EFBFBD> erreicht.
+.TP 
+evim eview
+Die grafische Version im einfachen Modus: <20>ffnet ein neues Fenster. Dasselbe
+wird mit dem Parameter <20>\-y<EFBFBD> erreicht.
+.TP 
+rvim rview rgvim rgview
+Wie die obigen, aber mit Beschr<68>nkungen: Es ist nicht m<>glich, Shell\-Befehle
+aufzurufen oder mit Unterbrechung in eine Shell zur<75>ckzuspringen. Dasselbe
+wird mit dem Parameter <20>\-Z<EFBFBD> erreicht.
+.SH OPTIONEN
+Die Optionen k<>nnen in beliebiger Reihenfolge vor oder nach den Dateinamen
+angegeben werden. Optionen ohne Parameter k<>nnen hinter einem einzigen
+Bindestrich gruppiert werden.
+.TP  12
++[Nummer]
+In der ersten Datei wird der Cursor auf die Zeile [Nummer] gesetzt. Falls
+[Nummer] nicht angegeben wird, wird der Cursor in die letzte Zeile der Datei
+gesetzt.
+.TP 
++/{Suchmuster}
+In der ersten Datei wird der Cursor auf das erste Auftreten von {Suchmuster}
+gesetzt. Siehe <20>:help search\-pattern<EFBFBD>.
+.TP 
++{Befehl}
+.TP 
+\-c {Befehl}
+{Befehl} wird nach dem Lesen der ersten Datei ausgef<65>hrt. Als {Befehl} wird
+ein Ex\-Befehl erwartet. Sind in {Befehl} Leerzeichen vorhanden, muss alles
+in Anf<6E>hrungszeichen gesetzt werden (h<>ngt von der verwendeten Shell
+ab). Beispiel: vim "+set si" main.c
+.br
+Anmerkung: Sie k<>nnen bis zu 10 <20>+<2B>\- oder "\-c<EFBFBD>\-Befehle verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-S {Datei}
+{Datei} wird nach dem Lesen der ersten Datei ausgef<65>hrt. Dies entspricht <20>\-c
+"source {Datei}"<22>. {Datei} darf nicht mit einem Bindestrich (\-)
+anfangen. Wenn kein Dateiname angegeben wird, wird <20>Session.vim<69> verwendet
+(Funktioniert nur, wenn <20>\-S<EFBFBD> als letzter Parameter steht).
+.TP 
+\-\-cmd {Befehl}
+Wie <20>\-c<EFBFBD>, aber dieser Befehl wird vor allen VimRC\-Dateien ausgef<65>hrt. Sie
+k<EFBFBD>nnen unabh<62>ngig von den <20>\-c<EFBFBD>\-Befehlen bis zu 10 dieser Befehle verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-A
+Falls \fBVim\fP mit Unterst<73>tzung f<>r das Schreiben von rechts nach links und
+arabischer Tastaturbelegung compiliert wurde (ARABIC), startet dieser
+Parameter den Modus f<>rs Arabische (:set arabic). Anderenfalls beendet sich
+\fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung.
+.TP 
+b
+Bin<EFBFBD>rer Modus: Es werden einige Variablen gesetzt, sodass es m<>glich ist,
+eine bin<69>re oder ausf<73>hrbare Datei zu bearbeiten.
+.TP 
+\-C
+Kompatibel: Setzt die Option 'compatible'. Das macht \fBVim\fP im Verhalten
+sehr <20>hnlich zu Vi, selbst wenn eine VimRC\-Datei existiert.
+.TP 
+\-d
+Startet im diff\-Modus. Es sollten zwei, drei oder vier Dateinamen als
+Parameter <20>bergeben werden. \fBVim\fP <20>ffnet sie alle und zeigt die
+Unterschiede an. Arbeitet wie vimdiff(1).
+.TP 
+\-d {Ger<65>t}
+<EFBFBD>ffnet das {Ger<65>t}, um es als Terminal zu nutzen. Nur f<>r AmigaOS. Beispiel:
+"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
+.TP 
+D
+Debug\-Modus: \fBVim\fP geht in den Debug\-Modus, wenn der erste Befehl in einem
+Skript ausgef<65>hrt wird.
+.TP 
+\-e
+Startet \fBVim\fP im Ex\-Modus, als w<>rde als ausf<73>hrbare Datei <20>ex<65> aufgerufen.
+.TP 
+\-E
+Startet \fBVim\fP im erweiterten Ex\-Modus, als w<>rde die ausf<73>hrbare Datei als
+<EFBFBD>exim<EFBFBD> aufgerufen.
+.TP 
+\-f
+Vordergrund: Bei der GUI\-Version erzeugt \fBVim\fP keinen neuen Prozess und
+l<EFBFBD>st sich nicht von der Shell, in der er aufgerufen wurde. Bei AmigaOS wird
+kein neues Fenster ge<67>ffnet. Dieser Parameter wird benutzt, damit das
+aufrufende Programm auf das Beenden des Bearbeitungssitzung wartet (z.B.:
+mail). Bei AmigaOS funktionieren die Befehle <20>:sh<73> und ":!<21> nicht.
+.TP 
+\-\-nofork
+Vordergrund: Bei der GUI\-Version erzeugt \fBVim\fP keinen neuen Prozess und
+l<EFBFBD>st sich nicht von der Shell, in der er aufgerufen wurde.
+.TP 
+\-F
+Wenn \fBVim\fP mit FKMAP\-Unterst<EFBFBD>tzung f<>r das Schreiben von rechts nach links
+und Farsi\-Tastatur\-Belegung kompiliert wurde, startet Vim im Farsi\-Modus,
+d.h. die Optionen 'fkmap' und 'rightleft' werden gesetzt. Andernfalls bricht
+\fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung ab.
+.TP 
+\-g
+Falls \fBVim\fP mit GUI\-Unterst<EFBFBD>tzung kompiliert wurde, wird die GUI
+aktiviert. Falls keine GUI\-Unterst<EFBFBD>tzung einkompiliert wurde, wird mit einer
+Fehlermeldung abgebrochen.
+.TP 
+\-h
+Gibt eine kleine Hilfe f<>r die Befehlszeilenparameter aus. Danach beendet
+sich \fBVim.\fP
+.TP 
+\-H
+Hebr<EFBFBD>isch\-Modus, falls \fBVim\fP mit RIGHTLEFT\-Unterst<EFBFBD>tzung f<>r das Schreiben
+von rechts nach links und hebr<62>ischer Tastaturbelegung kompiliert wurde,
+werden die Optionen 'hkmap' und 'rightleft' gesetzt. Andernfalls beendet
+sich \fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung.
+.TP 
+\-i {VimInfo}
+Wenn eine VimInfo\-Datei verwendet wird: Verwendet statt <20>~/.viminfo<66> die
+angegebene Datei. Es ist auch m<>glich die Verwendung einer VimInfo\-Datei
+durch Angabe des Dateinamen <20>NONE<4E> zu verhindern,
+.TP 
+\-L
+dasselbe wie <20>\-r<EFBFBD>
+.TP 
+\-l
+Lisp\-Modus. Aktiviert die Optionen 'lisp' und 'showmatch'.
+.TP 
+\-m
+Deaktiviert das Ver<65>ndern von Dateien, indem die Option 'write' gel<65>scht
+wird. Der Puffer kann ver<65>ndert werden, nur das Schreiben einer Datei ist
+nicht m<>glich.
+.TP 
+\-M
+Keine Ver<65>nderungen erlaubt: Die Optionen 'modifiable' und 'write' werden
+gel<EFBFBD>scht, so dass <20>nderungen nicht erlaubt sind und Dateien nicht
+geschrieben werden k<>nnen. Man beachte, dass diese Optionen ('modifiable',
+\&'write') dennnoch nachtr<74>glich zum Erlauben von <20>nderungen gesetzt werden
+k<EFBFBD>nnen.
+.TP 
+\-N
+Nicht\-kompatibler Modus: L<>scht die Option 'compatible'. Dies veranlasst
+\fBVim\fP, sich ein wenig besser, aber weniger Vi\-kompatibel zu verhalten,
+selbst wenn es keine VimRC\-Datei gibt.
+.TP 
+\-n
+Verwendet keine Auslagerungsdatei: Eine Wiederherstellung nach einem Absturz
+ist nicht m<>glich. Auf einem langsamen Medium (Diskette) kann diese
+Einstellung n<>tzlich sein. Kann auch mit <20>set uc=0<> erreicht werden; kann
+mit <20>set uc=200<30> aufgehoben werden.
+.TP 
+\-nb
+\fBVim\fP fungiert als Server f<>r NetBeans. Details siehe Dokumentation.
+.TP 
+\-o[N]
+<EFBFBD>ffnet [N] Fenster <20>bereinander. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, <20>ffne ein
+Fenster pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-O[N]
+<EFBFBD>ffnet [N] Fenster nebeneinander. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, <20>ffne ein
+Fenster pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-p[N]
+<EFBFBD>ffnet [N] Reiterseiten. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, <20>ffne eine
+Reiterseite pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-R
+Nur\-Lesen\-Modus: Die Option 'readonly' wird gesetzt. Der Puffer kann noch
+bearbeitet werden, aber es wird verhindert, eine Datei aus Versehen zu
+<EFBFBD>berschreiben. Wenn Sie wirklich eine Datei <20>berschreiben wollen, f<>gen Sie
+dem Ex\-Befehl ein Ausrufezeichen hinzu (wie in <20>:w!<21>). Die Option "\-R<EFBFBD>
+bedingt die Option <20>\-n<EFBFBD> (siehe oben). Die Option 'readonly' kann durch ":set
+noro<EFBFBD> gel<65>scht werden. Siehe <20>:help 'readonly'<27>.
+.TP 
+\-r
+Listet die Auslagerungsdateien und gibt Informationen zu ihrer
+Verwendbarkeit zur Wiederherstellung.
+.TP 
+\-r {Datei}
+Wiederherstellungsmodus: Die Auslagerungsdatei wird zur Wiederherstellung
+verwendet und hat denselben Dateinamen wie die Text\-Datei + <20>.swp<77>. Siehe
+":help recovery<72>.
+.TP 
+\-s
+Der stille Modus: Nur wenn die ausf<73>hrbare Datei als <20>ex<65> aufgerufen wird
+oder vor <20>\-s<EFBFBD> die Option "\-e<EFBFBD> gegeben wird.
+.TP 
+\-s {Eingabeskript}
+Die Datei {Eingabeskript} wird gelesen und ausgef<65>hrt, als w<>rden Sie die
+Zeichen in ihr tippen. Dasselbe kann mit dem Befehl <20>:source!
+{Eingabeskript}<7D> erreicht werden. Wird das Ende der Datei vor dem Beenden
+des Editors erreicht, werden weitere Zeichen von der Tastatur gelesen.
+.TP 
+\-T {Terminal}
+Setzt den Namen des benutzten Terminals. Nur erforderlich, wenn die
+Automatik nicht funktioniert. Sollte ein \fBVim\fP bekanntes Terminal sein:
+(builtin) oder in einer termcap\- oder terminfo\-Datei definiert.
+.TP 
+\-u {VimRC}
+Verwendet zur Initialisierung die Befehle in der Datei {VimRC}. Alle anderen
+Initialisierungen werden <20>bersprungen. Benutzen Sie dies, um eine besondere
+Art von Dateien zu bearbeiten. Dies kann auch benutzt werden, um alle
+Initialisierungen zu <20>berspringen, indem der Name <20>NONE<4E> angegeben wird. F<>r
+weitere Einzelheiten siehe <20>:help initialisation<6F> innerhalb von Vim.
+.TP 
+\-U {GvimRC}
+Benutzt die Befehle in der Datei {GvimRC} f<>r die Initialisierung der
+grafischen Oberfl<66>che. Alle anderen Initialisierungen werden
+<EFBFBD>bersprungen. Dies kann ebenfalls benutzt werden, um alle
+GUI\-Initialisierungen zu <20>berspringen, indem der Name <20>NONE<4E> angegeben
+wird. Siehe <20>:help gui\-init<EFBFBD> innerhalb von Vim f<>r weitere Einzelheiten.
+.TP 
+\-V[N]
+Ausf<EFBFBD>hrlich (verbose): Gibt Meldungen dar<61>ber, welche Befehlsdateien
+eingelesen werden, und <20>ber das Lesen und Schreiben einer VimInfo\-Datei. Die
+optionale Zahl N ist der Wert f<>r 'verbose'. Vorgabe ist 10.
+.TP 
+\-v
+Startet \fBVim\fP im Vi\-Modus, so als w<>rde die ausf<73>hrbare Datei mit <20>vi<76>
+aufgerufen. Dies wirkt sich nur aus, wenn die ausf<73>hrbare Datei als <20>ex<65>
+aufgerufen wird.
+.TP 
+\-w {Ausgabeskript}
+Alle Zeichen, die eingetippt werden, werden in der Datei {Ausgabeskript}
+aufgezeichnet, solange bis Sie \fBVim\fP beenden. Dies ist n<>tzlich, falls Sie
+eine Skript\-Datei zum Benutzen mit <20>vim \-s<EFBFBD> oder ":source!<21> erzeugen
+wollen. Falls die Datei {Ausgabeskript} vorhanden ist, werden die Zeichen
+angeh<EFBFBD>ngt.
+.TP 
+\-W {Ausgabeskript}
+Wie \-w, aber eine bereits vorhandene Datei wird <20>berschrieben.
+.TP 
+\-x
+Benutzt beim Schreiben von Dateien eine Verschl<68>sselung. Fragt nach dem
+Schl<EFBFBD>ssel.
+.TP 
+\-X
+F<EFBFBD>hrt keine Verbindung zum X\-Server durch. Dadurch verk<72>rzt sich die
+Startzeit, aber der Fenstertitel und die Zwischenablage werden nicht
+verwendet.
+.TP 
+\-y
+Startet \fBVim\fP im einfachen Modus, als w<>rde die ausf<73>hrbare Datei mit
+<EFBFBD>evim<EFBFBD> oder <20>eview<65> aufgerufen. \fBVim\fP verh<72>lt sich dann wie ein Editor zum
+Klicken und Tippen.
+.TP 
+\-Z
+Eingeschr<EFBFBD>nkter Modus: Funktioniert, als w<>rde der Name der ausf<73>hrbaren
+Datei mit <20>r<EFBFBD> beginnen.
+.TP 
+\-\-
+Markiert das Ende der Optionen. Argumente, die folgen, werden als Dateinamen
+behandelt. Dies kann benutzt werden, um einen Dateinamen mit <20>\-<EFBFBD> am Anfang
+zu verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-\-echo\-wid
+Nur GTK\-GUI: Schreibe die Fenster\-ID auf die Standardausgabe.
+.TP 
+\-\-help
+Gibt eine Hilfe\-Nachricht aus und beendet, wie <20>\-h<EFBFBD>.
+.TP 
+\-\-literal
+Nimmt die Dateinamen so wie sie sind und vervollst<73>ndigt sie nicht nach
+Metazeichen (*,?). Dies wirkt sich nicht unter Unix aus, wo die Shell die
+Metazeichen expandiert.
+.TP 
+\-\-noplugin
+Lade keine Plugins. Impliziert durch <20>\-u NONE<4E>.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server und l<>sst ihn die in den restlichen
+Argumenten angegeben Dateien editieren. Wenn kein Server gefunden wird,
+f<EFBFBD>hrt dies zu einer Warnmeldung und die Dateien werden im gegenw<6E>rtigen Vim
+zum Bearbeiten ge<67>ffnet.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-expr {Ausdruck}
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server, f<>hrt {Ausdruck} aus und zeigt das Ergebnis
+auf der Standardausgabe an.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-send {Zeichen}
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server und sendet ihm {Zeichen}.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-silent
+Wie <20>\-\-remote<EFBFBD>, aber ohne Warnung, wenn kein Server gefunden wird.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-wait
+Wie <20>\-\-remote<EFBFBD>, aber Vim beendet sich nicht, bis die Dateien bearbeitet
+wurden.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-wait\-silent
+Wie <20>\-\-remote\-wait<EFBFBD>, aber ohne Warnung, wenn kein Server gefunden wird.
+.TP 
+\-\-serverlist
+Listet die Namen aller gefundenen Vim\-Server auf.
+.TP 
+\-\-servername {Name}
+Benutzt {Name} als Server\-Namen. Wird f<>r den gegenw<6E>rtigen Vim benutzt,
+au<EFBFBD>er es wird mit dem Argument <20>\-\-remote<EFBFBD> benutzt, dann ist es der Name des
+zu kontaktierenden Servers.
+.TP 
+\-\-socketid {id}
+Nur GTK\-GUI: Benutzt den GtkPlug\-Mechanismus, um GVim in einem anderen
+Fenster laufen zu lassen.
+.TP 
+\-\-version
+Versionsinformation anzeigen und beenden
+.SH "EINGEBAUTE HILFE"
+Tippen Sie in \fBVim\fP <20>:help<6C>, um zu beginnen. Geben Sie ":help begriff<66> ein,
+um Hilfe <20>ber ein bestimmtes Thema zu bekommen. Zum Beispiel <20>:help ZZ<5A> f<>r
+Hilfe <20>ber den Befehl <20>ZZ<5A>. Benutzen Sie <Tab> und CTRL\-D, um
+Begriffe zu vervollst<73>ndigen (<28>:help cmdline\-completion<EFBFBD>). Tags sind
+vorhanden, um von einem Ort zum anderen zu springen (eine Art
+Hypertext\-Verkn<EFBFBD>pfungen, siehe <20>:help<6C>). Auf diese Weise k<>nnen alle
+Dokumentations\-Dateien aufgerufen werden, zum Beispiel <20>:help syntax.txt<78>.
+.SH DATEIEN
+.TP  15
+/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/*.txt
+Dokumentations\-Dateien f<>r \fBVim\fP. Verwenden Sie <20>:help doc\-file\-list<EFBFBD>, um
+die gesamte Liste zu bekommen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/tags
+Die <20>Tag<61>\-Datei, die verwendet wird, um Informationen in der Dokumentation
+zu finden.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/syntax.vim
+Die systemweite Einrichtung der Syntaxhervorhebung.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/*.vim
+Syntaxdateien f<>r die verschiedenen Sprachen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/vimrc
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei f<>r \fBVim\fP
+.TP 
+~/.vimrc
+Pers<EFBFBD>nliche Einstellungsdatei f<>r \fBVim\fP
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/gvimrc
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei f<>r GVim
+.TP 
+~/.gvimrc
+Pers<EFBFBD>nliche Einstellungsdatei f<>r GVim
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/optwin.vim
+Das Script, das von dem Befehl <20>:options<6E> verwendet wird, eine sch<63>ne
+M<EFBFBD>glichkeit, um Optionen zu betrachten und zu setzen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/menu.vim
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei f<>r das Men<65> von GVim
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/bugreport.vim
+Das Script zum Generieren eines Fehlerberichts. Siehe <20>:help bugs<67>.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/filetype.vim
+Mit diesem Script erkennt Vim den Typ einer Datei anhand ihres
+Dateinamens. Siehe <20>:help 'filetype'<27>.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/scripts.vim
+Mit diesem Script erkennt Vim den Typ einer Datei anhand ihres
+Inhaltes. Siehe <20>:help 'filetype'<27>.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/print/*.ps
+Diese Dateien werden zum Drucken von PostScript verwendet.
+.PP
+F<EFBFBD>r die neuesten Informationen lesen Sie die Vim\-Homepage:
+.br
+<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
+.SH "SIEHE AUCH"
+vimtutor(1)
+.SH AUTOR
+\fBVim\fP wurde gr<67><72>tenteils von Bram Moolenaar erstellt, mit viel Hilfe von
+anderen Leuten. Siehe <20>:help credits<74> in \fBVim.\fP
+.br
+\fBVim\fP basiert auf Stevie, der von Tim Thompson, Tony Andrews und
+G.R. (Fred) Walter geschrieben wurde. Es ist jedoch kaum etwas vom
+urspr<EFBFBD>nglichen Code <20>brig geblieben.
+.SH FEHLER
+Die sind m<>glich. Siehe <20>:help todo<64> f<>r eine Liste bekannter Probleme.
+.PP
+Beachten Sie, dass gewisse Dinge, die manche Leute als Fehler betrachten
+m<EFBFBD>gen, in Wirklichkeit durch zu getreue Nachbildung des Vi\-Verhaltens
+verursacht werden. Und falls Sie denken, dass andere Dinge Fehler sind,
+<EFBFBD>weil Vi es anders tut<75>, sollten Sie einen genaueren Blick auf die Datei
+vi_diff.txt werfen (oder in Vim <20>:help vi_diff.txt<78> tippen). Sehen Sie sich
+auch die Optionen 'compatible' und 'cpoptions' an.

runtime/doc/vim-de.UTF-8.1

@@ -0,0 +1,478 @@
+.\"*******************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" This file was generated with po4a. Translate the source file.
+.\"
+.\"*******************************************************************
+.\" Translated by bw1 (2008) and Florian Rehnisch <fm-r@gmx.de> (2012)
+.\" Kudos to the folks on vim-dev and debian-l10n-german
+.TH VIM 1 "2006 Apr 11"  
+.SH BEZEICHNUNG
+vim \- Vi IMproved, ein Text\-Editor für Programmierer
+.SH ÜBERSICHT
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] [Datei …]
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-t Tag
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-q [Fehlerdatei]
+.PP
+.br
+\fBex\fP
+.br
+\fBview\fP
+.br
+\fBgvim\fP \fBgview\fP \fBevim\fP \fBeview\fP
+.br
+\fBrvim\fP \fBrview\fP \fBrgvim\fP \fBrgview\fP
+.SH BESCHREIBUNG
+\fBVim\fP ist ein Text\-Editor, der aufwärtskompatibel zu Vi ist. Er kann
+verwendet werden, um alle Arten von Klartext zu bearbeiten. Er ist besonders
+nützlich, um Programme zu bearbeiten.
+.PP
+Vim hat einige Erweiterungen gegenüber Vi, z.B.: Rückgängigmachen in
+mehreren Schritten, mehrere Fenster und Puffer, Syntax\-Hervorhebung,
+Bearbeiten der Befehlszeile, Dateinamenergänzung, eingebaute Hilfe, visuelle
+Auswahl, usw. … Siehe »:help vi_diff.txt« für eine Übersicht der
+Unterschiede zwischen \fBVim\fP und Vi.
+.PP
+Im laufenden \fBVim\fP kann mit dem Befehl »:help« viel Hilfe durch das
+eingebaute Hilfesystem erlangt werden. Siehe den Abschnitt EINGEBAUTE HILFE
+weiter unten.
+.PP
+Meistens wird \fBVim\fP zum Editieren einer einzigen Datei mit dem folgende
+Befehl gestartet:
+.PP
+  vim Datei
+.PP
+Allgemeiner betrachtet, wird \fBVim\fP folgendermaßen gestartet:
+.PP
+  vim [Optionen] [Dateiliste]
+.PP
+Bei einer fehlenden Dateiliste startet der Editor mit einem leeren
+Puffer. Andernfalls werden nach den folgenden vier Möglichkeiten eine oder
+mehrere Dateien bearbeitet:
+.TP  12
+Datei …
+Eine Liste von Dateinamen. Die erste Datei wird in den Puffer geladen und
+zur aktuellen. Der Cursor wird auf der ersten Zeile des Puffers
+platziert. Zu den anderen Dateien kann mit dem Befehl »:next« gelangt
+werden. Falls einer der Dateinamen mit einem Bindestrich beginnt, stellen
+Sie der Dateiliste »\-\-« voran.
+.TP 
+\-
+Die zu bearbeitende Datei wird von der Standardeingabe gelesen. Befehle
+werden von der Standardfehlerausgabe gelesen, die ein Text\-Terminal sein
+sollte.
+.TP 
+\-t {Tag}
+Die zu editierende Datei und die anfängliche Cursor\-Position hängen von
+einem »Tag« ab, einer Art Sprungmarke. {Tag} wird in der Tag\-Datei
+nachgeschlagen, die zugehörige Datei wird zur aktuellen und der zugehörige
+Befehl wird ausgeführt. Dies wird meistens für Programme in der Sprache »C«
+benutzt, wobei {Tag} ein Funktionsname sein könnte. Die Wirkung dieses
+Befehls ist, dass die Datei, die die Funktion enthält, als aktuelle im
+Editor geöffnet und angezeigt wird und der Cursor auf dem Beginn der
+Funktion positioniert wird. Siehe »:help tag\-commands«.
+.TP 
+\-q [Fehlerdatei]
+Startet im QuickFix\-Modus. Die Datei [Fehlerdatei] wird gelesen und der
+erste Fehler wird angezeigt. Falls [Fehlerdatei] ausgelassen wird, wird der
+Dateiname aus der Option 'errorfile' verwendet (bei AmigaOS ist dies
+vorgabemäßig »AztecC.Err«, sowie „errors.err« bei anderen). Weitere Fehler
+können mit dem »:cn«\-Befehl angesprungen werden. Siehe „:help quickfix«.
+.PP
+\fBVim\fP reagiert unterschiedlich auf den Namen, der verwendet wird, um Vim zu
+starten (die ausführbare Datei kann dieselbe sein).
+.TP  10
+vim
+der »normale« Weg, alles ist standardmäßig
+.TP 
+ex
+Startet im Ex\-Modus. Mit dem Befehl »:vi« gelangt man in den normalen
+Modus. Funktioniert auch mit dem Argument »\-e«.
+.TP 
+view
+Startet im Nur\-Lesen\-Modus. Die Datei wird vor dem Überschreiben
+geschützt. Dasselbe wird mit dem Parameter »\-R« erreicht.
+.TP 
+gvim gview
+Die grafische Version: Öffnet ein neues Fenster. Dasselbe wird mit dem
+Parameter »\-g« erreicht.
+.TP 
+evim eview
+Die grafische Version im einfachen Modus: Öffnet ein neues Fenster. Dasselbe
+wird mit dem Parameter »\-y« erreicht.
+.TP 
+rvim rview rgvim rgview
+Wie die obigen, aber mit Beschränkungen: Es ist nicht möglich, Shell\-Befehle
+aufzurufen oder mit Unterbrechung in eine Shell zurückzuspringen. Dasselbe
+wird mit dem Parameter »\-Z« erreicht.
+.SH OPTIONEN
+Die Optionen können in beliebiger Reihenfolge vor oder nach den Dateinamen
+angegeben werden. Optionen ohne Parameter können hinter einem einzigen
+Bindestrich gruppiert werden.
+.TP  12
++[Nummer]
+In der ersten Datei wird der Cursor auf die Zeile [Nummer] gesetzt. Falls
+[Nummer] nicht angegeben wird, wird der Cursor in die letzte Zeile der Datei
+gesetzt.
+.TP 
++/{Suchmuster}
+In der ersten Datei wird der Cursor auf das erste Auftreten von {Suchmuster}
+gesetzt. Siehe »:help search\-pattern«.
+.TP 
++{Befehl}
+.TP 
+\-c {Befehl}
+{Befehl} wird nach dem Lesen der ersten Datei ausgeführt. Als {Befehl} wird
+ein Ex\-Befehl erwartet. Sind in {Befehl} Leerzeichen vorhanden, muss alles
+in Anführungszeichen gesetzt werden (hängt von der verwendeten Shell
+ab). Beispiel: vim "+set si" main.c
+.br
+Anmerkung: Sie können bis zu 10 »+«\- oder „\-c«\-Befehle verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-S {Datei}
+{Datei} wird nach dem Lesen der ersten Datei ausgeführt. Dies entspricht »\-c
+"source {Datei}"«. {Datei} darf nicht mit einem Bindestrich (\-)
+anfangen. Wenn kein Dateiname angegeben wird, wird »Session.vim« verwendet
+(Funktioniert nur, wenn »\-S« als letzter Parameter steht).
+.TP 
+\-\-cmd {Befehl}
+Wie »\-c«, aber dieser Befehl wird vor allen VimRC\-Dateien ausgeführt. Sie
+können unabhängig von den »\-c«\-Befehlen bis zu 10 dieser Befehle verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-A
+Falls \fBVim\fP mit Unterstützung für das Schreiben von rechts nach links und
+arabischer Tastaturbelegung compiliert wurde (ARABIC), startet dieser
+Parameter den Modus fürs Arabische (:set arabic). Anderenfalls beendet sich
+\fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung.
+.TP 
+b
+Binärer Modus: Es werden einige Variablen gesetzt, sodass es möglich ist,
+eine binäre oder ausführbare Datei zu bearbeiten.
+.TP 
+\-C
+Kompatibel: Setzt die Option 'compatible'. Das macht \fBVim\fP im Verhalten
+sehr ähnlich zu Vi, selbst wenn eine VimRC\-Datei existiert.
+.TP 
+\-d
+Startet im diff\-Modus. Es sollten zwei, drei oder vier Dateinamen als
+Parameter übergeben werden. \fBVim\fP öffnet sie alle und zeigt die
+Unterschiede an. Arbeitet wie vimdiff(1).
+.TP 
+\-d {Gerät}
+Öffnet das {Gerät}, um es als Terminal zu nutzen. Nur für AmigaOS. Beispiel:
+"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
+.TP 
+D
+Debug\-Modus: \fBVim\fP geht in den Debug\-Modus, wenn der erste Befehl in einem
+Skript ausgeführt wird.
+.TP 
+\-e
+Startet \fBVim\fP im Ex\-Modus, als würde als ausführbare Datei »ex« aufgerufen.
+.TP 
+\-E
+Startet \fBVim\fP im erweiterten Ex\-Modus, als würde die ausführbare Datei als
+»exim« aufgerufen.
+.TP 
+\-f
+Vordergrund: Bei der GUI\-Version erzeugt \fBVim\fP keinen neuen Prozess und
+löst sich nicht von der Shell, in der er aufgerufen wurde. Bei AmigaOS wird
+kein neues Fenster geöffnet. Dieser Parameter wird benutzt, damit das
+aufrufende Programm auf das Beenden des Bearbeitungssitzung wartet (z.B.:
+mail). Bei AmigaOS funktionieren die Befehle »:sh« und „:!« nicht.
+.TP 
+\-\-nofork
+Vordergrund: Bei der GUI\-Version erzeugt \fBVim\fP keinen neuen Prozess und
+löst sich nicht von der Shell, in der er aufgerufen wurde.
+.TP 
+\-F
+Wenn \fBVim\fP mit FKMAP\-Unterstützung für das Schreiben von rechts nach links
+und Farsi\-Tastatur\-Belegung kompiliert wurde, startet Vim im Farsi\-Modus,
+d.h. die Optionen 'fkmap' und 'rightleft' werden gesetzt. Andernfalls bricht
+\fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung ab.
+.TP 
+\-g
+Falls \fBVim\fP mit GUI\-Unterstützung kompiliert wurde, wird die GUI
+aktiviert. Falls keine GUI\-Unterstützung einkompiliert wurde, wird mit einer
+Fehlermeldung abgebrochen.
+.TP 
+\-h
+Gibt eine kleine Hilfe für die Befehlszeilenparameter aus. Danach beendet
+sich \fBVim.\fP
+.TP 
+\-H
+Hebräisch\-Modus, falls \fBVim\fP mit RIGHTLEFT\-Unterstützung für das Schreiben
+von rechts nach links und hebräischer Tastaturbelegung kompiliert wurde,
+werden die Optionen 'hkmap' und 'rightleft' gesetzt. Andernfalls beendet
+sich \fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung.
+.TP 
+\-i {VimInfo}
+Wenn eine VimInfo\-Datei verwendet wird: Verwendet statt »~/.viminfo« die
+angegebene Datei. Es ist auch möglich die Verwendung einer VimInfo\-Datei
+durch Angabe des Dateinamen »NONE« zu verhindern,
+.TP 
+\-L
+dasselbe wie »\-r«
+.TP 
+\-l
+Lisp\-Modus. Aktiviert die Optionen 'lisp' und 'showmatch'.
+.TP 
+\-m
+Deaktiviert das Verändern von Dateien, indem die Option 'write' gelöscht
+wird. Der Puffer kann verändert werden, nur das Schreiben einer Datei ist
+nicht möglich.
+.TP 
+\-M
+Keine Veränderungen erlaubt: Die Optionen 'modifiable' und 'write' werden
+gelöscht, so dass Änderungen nicht erlaubt sind und Dateien nicht
+geschrieben werden können. Man beachte, dass diese Optionen ('modifiable',
+\&'write') dennnoch nachträglich zum Erlauben von Änderungen gesetzt werden
+können.
+.TP 
+\-N
+Nicht\-kompatibler Modus: Löscht die Option 'compatible'. Dies veranlasst
+\fBVim\fP, sich ein wenig besser, aber weniger Vi\-kompatibel zu verhalten,
+selbst wenn es keine VimRC\-Datei gibt.
+.TP 
+\-n
+Verwendet keine Auslagerungsdatei: Eine Wiederherstellung nach einem Absturz
+ist nicht möglich. Auf einem langsamen Medium (Diskette) kann diese
+Einstellung nützlich sein. Kann auch mit »set uc=0« erreicht werden; kann
+mit »set uc=200« aufgehoben werden.
+.TP 
+\-nb
+\fBVim\fP fungiert als Server für NetBeans. Details siehe Dokumentation.
+.TP 
+\-o[N]
+Öffnet [N] Fenster übereinander. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, öffne ein
+Fenster pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-O[N]
+Öffnet [N] Fenster nebeneinander. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, öffne ein
+Fenster pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-p[N]
+Öffnet [N] Reiterseiten. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, öffne eine
+Reiterseite pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-R
+Nur\-Lesen\-Modus: Die Option 'readonly' wird gesetzt. Der Puffer kann noch
+bearbeitet werden, aber es wird verhindert, eine Datei aus Versehen zu
+überschreiben. Wenn Sie wirklich eine Datei überschreiben wollen, fügen Sie
+dem Ex\-Befehl ein Ausrufezeichen hinzu (wie in »:w!«). Die Option „\-R«
+bedingt die Option »\-n« (siehe oben). Die Option 'readonly' kann durch „:set
+noro« gelöscht werden. Siehe »:help 'readonly'«.
+.TP 
+\-r
+Listet die Auslagerungsdateien und gibt Informationen zu ihrer
+Verwendbarkeit zur Wiederherstellung.
+.TP 
+\-r {Datei}
+Wiederherstellungsmodus: Die Auslagerungsdatei wird zur Wiederherstellung
+verwendet und hat denselben Dateinamen wie die Text\-Datei + ».swp«. Siehe
+„:help recovery«.
+.TP 
+\-s
+Der stille Modus: Nur wenn die ausführbare Datei als »ex« aufgerufen wird
+oder vor »\-s« die Option „\-e« gegeben wird.
+.TP 
+\-s {Eingabeskript}
+Die Datei {Eingabeskript} wird gelesen und ausgeführt, als würden Sie die
+Zeichen in ihr tippen. Dasselbe kann mit dem Befehl »:source!
+{Eingabeskript}« erreicht werden. Wird das Ende der Datei vor dem Beenden
+des Editors erreicht, werden weitere Zeichen von der Tastatur gelesen.
+.TP 
+\-T {Terminal}
+Setzt den Namen des benutzten Terminals. Nur erforderlich, wenn die
+Automatik nicht funktioniert. Sollte ein \fBVim\fP bekanntes Terminal sein:
+(builtin) oder in einer termcap\- oder terminfo\-Datei definiert.
+.TP 
+\-u {VimRC}
+Verwendet zur Initialisierung die Befehle in der Datei {VimRC}. Alle anderen
+Initialisierungen werden übersprungen. Benutzen Sie dies, um eine besondere
+Art von Dateien zu bearbeiten. Dies kann auch benutzt werden, um alle
+Initialisierungen zu überspringen, indem der Name »NONE« angegeben wird. Für
+weitere Einzelheiten siehe »:help initialisation« innerhalb von Vim.
+.TP 
+\-U {GvimRC}
+Benutzt die Befehle in der Datei {GvimRC} für die Initialisierung der
+grafischen Oberfläche. Alle anderen Initialisierungen werden
+übersprungen. Dies kann ebenfalls benutzt werden, um alle
+GUI\-Initialisierungen zu überspringen, indem der Name »NONE« angegeben
+wird. Siehe »:help gui\-init« innerhalb von Vim für weitere Einzelheiten.
+.TP 
+\-V[N]
+Ausführlich (verbose): Gibt Meldungen darüber, welche Befehlsdateien
+eingelesen werden, und über das Lesen und Schreiben einer VimInfo\-Datei. Die
+optionale Zahl N ist der Wert für 'verbose'. Vorgabe ist 10.
+.TP 
+\-v
+Startet \fBVim\fP im Vi\-Modus, so als würde die ausführbare Datei mit »vi«
+aufgerufen. Dies wirkt sich nur aus, wenn die ausführbare Datei als »ex«
+aufgerufen wird.
+.TP 
+\-w {Ausgabeskript}
+Alle Zeichen, die eingetippt werden, werden in der Datei {Ausgabeskript}
+aufgezeichnet, solange bis Sie \fBVim\fP beenden. Dies ist nützlich, falls Sie
+eine Skript\-Datei zum Benutzen mit »vim \-s« oder „:source!« erzeugen
+wollen. Falls die Datei {Ausgabeskript} vorhanden ist, werden die Zeichen
+angehängt.
+.TP 
+\-W {Ausgabeskript}
+Wie \-w, aber eine bereits vorhandene Datei wird überschrieben.
+.TP 
+\-x
+Benutzt beim Schreiben von Dateien eine Verschlüsselung. Fragt nach dem
+Schlüssel.
+.TP 
+\-X
+Führt keine Verbindung zum X\-Server durch. Dadurch verkürzt sich die
+Startzeit, aber der Fenstertitel und die Zwischenablage werden nicht
+verwendet.
+.TP 
+\-y
+Startet \fBVim\fP im einfachen Modus, als würde die ausführbare Datei mit
+»evim« oder »eview« aufgerufen. \fBVim\fP verhält sich dann wie ein Editor zum
+Klicken und Tippen.
+.TP 
+\-Z
+Eingeschränkter Modus: Funktioniert, als würde der Name der ausführbaren
+Datei mit »r« beginnen.
+.TP 
+\-\-
+Markiert das Ende der Optionen. Argumente, die folgen, werden als Dateinamen
+behandelt. Dies kann benutzt werden, um einen Dateinamen mit »\-« am Anfang
+zu verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-\-echo\-wid
+Nur GTK\-GUI: Schreibe die Fenster\-ID auf die Standardausgabe.
+.TP 
+\-\-help
+Gibt eine Hilfe\-Nachricht aus und beendet, wie »\-h«.
+.TP 
+\-\-literal
+Nimmt die Dateinamen so wie sie sind und vervollständigt sie nicht nach
+Metazeichen (*,?). Dies wirkt sich nicht unter Unix aus, wo die Shell die
+Metazeichen expandiert.
+.TP 
+\-\-noplugin
+Lade keine Plugins. Impliziert durch »\-u NONE«.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server und lässt ihn die in den restlichen
+Argumenten angegeben Dateien editieren. Wenn kein Server gefunden wird,
+führt dies zu einer Warnmeldung und die Dateien werden im gegenwärtigen Vim
+zum Bearbeiten geöffnet.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-expr {Ausdruck}
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server, führt {Ausdruck} aus und zeigt das Ergebnis
+auf der Standardausgabe an.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-send {Zeichen}
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server und sendet ihm {Zeichen}.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-silent
+Wie »\-\-remote«, aber ohne Warnung, wenn kein Server gefunden wird.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-wait
+Wie »\-\-remote«, aber Vim beendet sich nicht, bis die Dateien bearbeitet
+wurden.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-wait\-silent
+Wie »\-\-remote\-wait«, aber ohne Warnung, wenn kein Server gefunden wird.
+.TP 
+\-\-serverlist
+Listet die Namen aller gefundenen Vim\-Server auf.
+.TP 
+\-\-servername {Name}
+Benutzt {Name} als Server\-Namen. Wird für den gegenwärtigen Vim benutzt,
+außer es wird mit dem Argument »\-\-remote« benutzt, dann ist es der Name des
+zu kontaktierenden Servers.
+.TP 
+\-\-socketid {id}
+Nur GTK\-GUI: Benutzt den GtkPlug\-Mechanismus, um GVim in einem anderen
+Fenster laufen zu lassen.
+.TP 
+\-\-version
+Versionsinformation anzeigen und beenden
+.SH "EINGEBAUTE HILFE"
+Tippen Sie in \fBVim\fP »:help«, um zu beginnen. Geben Sie „:help begriff« ein,
+um Hilfe über ein bestimmtes Thema zu bekommen. Zum Beispiel »:help ZZ« für
+Hilfe über den Befehl »ZZ«. Benutzen Sie <Tab> und CTRL\-D, um
+Begriffe zu vervollständigen (»:help cmdline\-completion«). Tags sind
+vorhanden, um von einem Ort zum anderen zu springen (eine Art
+Hypertext\-Verknüpfungen, siehe »:help«). Auf diese Weise können alle
+Dokumentations\-Dateien aufgerufen werden, zum Beispiel »:help syntax.txt«.
+.SH DATEIEN
+.TP  15
+/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/*.txt
+Dokumentations\-Dateien für \fBVim\fP. Verwenden Sie »:help doc\-file\-list«, um
+die gesamte Liste zu bekommen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/tags
+Die »Tag«\-Datei, die verwendet wird, um Informationen in der Dokumentation
+zu finden.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/syntax.vim
+Die systemweite Einrichtung der Syntaxhervorhebung.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/*.vim
+Syntaxdateien für die verschiedenen Sprachen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/vimrc
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei für \fBVim\fP
+.TP 
+~/.vimrc
+Persönliche Einstellungsdatei für \fBVim\fP
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/gvimrc
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei für GVim
+.TP 
+~/.gvimrc
+Persönliche Einstellungsdatei für GVim
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/optwin.vim
+Das Script, das von dem Befehl »:options« verwendet wird, eine schöne
+Möglichkeit, um Optionen zu betrachten und zu setzen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/menu.vim
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei für das Menü von GVim
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/bugreport.vim
+Das Script zum Generieren eines Fehlerberichts. Siehe »:help bugs«.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/filetype.vim
+Mit diesem Script erkennt Vim den Typ einer Datei anhand ihres
+Dateinamens. Siehe »:help 'filetype'«.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/scripts.vim
+Mit diesem Script erkennt Vim den Typ einer Datei anhand ihres
+Inhaltes. Siehe »:help 'filetype'«.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/print/*.ps
+Diese Dateien werden zum Drucken von PostScript verwendet.
+.PP
+Für die neuesten Informationen lesen Sie die Vim\-Homepage:
+.br
+<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
+.SH "SIEHE AUCH"
+vimtutor(1)
+.SH AUTOR
+\fBVim\fP wurde größtenteils von Bram Moolenaar erstellt, mit viel Hilfe von
+anderen Leuten. Siehe »:help credits« in \fBVim.\fP
+.br
+\fBVim\fP basiert auf Stevie, der von Tim Thompson, Tony Andrews und
+G.R. (Fred) Walter geschrieben wurde. Es ist jedoch kaum etwas vom
+ursprünglichen Code übrig geblieben.
+.SH FEHLER
+Die sind möglich. Siehe »:help todo« für eine Liste bekannter Probleme.
+.PP
+Beachten Sie, dass gewisse Dinge, die manche Leute als Fehler betrachten
+mögen, in Wirklichkeit durch zu getreue Nachbildung des Vi\-Verhaltens
+verursacht werden. Und falls Sie denken, dass andere Dinge Fehler sind,
+»weil Vi es anders tut«, sollten Sie einen genaueren Blick auf die Datei
+vi_diff.txt werfen (oder in Vim »:help vi_diff.txt« tippen). Sehen Sie sich
+auch die Optionen 'compatible' und 'cpoptions' an.

runtime/doc/vim-fr.1

@@ -586,3 +586,4 @@ Cette page de manuel a
 .br
 Cette page de manuel a <20>t<EFBFBD> mise <20> jour par David Blanchet.
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2006-04-10.
+Mise <20> jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pell<6C> <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>

runtime/doc/vim-fr.UTF-8.1

@@ -586,3 +586,4 @@ Cette page de manuel a été traduite par Richard Hitier.
 .br
 Cette page de manuel a été mise à jour par David Blanchet.
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2006-04-10.
+Mise à jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pellé <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>

runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.1

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ d
 .B Vim
 avec deux (ou trois ou quatre) fichiers.
 Chaque fichier est ouvert dans sa propre fen<65>tre.
-Les diff<66>rences entres ces fichiers sont mises en surbrillance.
+Les diff<66>rences entre ces fichiers sont mises en surbrillance.
 C'est un outil tr<74>s pratique pour visualiser et reporter les
 changements entre deux versions d'un m<>me fichier.
 .PP
@@ -51,3 +51,4 @@ Voir ":help credits" dans
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a <20>t<EFBFBD> traduite par David Blanchet
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-12.
+Mise <20> jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pell<6C> <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>

runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.UTF-8.1

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ démarre
 .B Vim
 avec deux (ou trois ou quatre) fichiers.
 Chaque fichier est ouvert dans sa propre fenêtre.
-Les différences entres ces fichiers sont mises en surbrillance.
+Les différences entre ces fichiers sont mises en surbrillance.
 C'est un outil très pratique pour visualiser et reporter les
 changements entre deux versions d'un même fichier.
 .PP
@@ -51,3 +51,4 @@ Voir ":help credits" dans
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a été traduite par David Blanchet
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-12.
+Mise à jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pellé <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>

runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.1

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 vimtutor \- tutoriel Vim
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .br
-.B vimtutor [-g] [langue]
+.B vimtutor [\-g] [langue]
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .B Vimtutor
 lance le tutoriel
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ est utile pour les personnes souhaitant apprendre leurs premi
 .B Vim
 \.
 .PP
-L'argument optionnel -g lance vimtutor avec gvim plut<75>t qu'avec vim, si l'IHM
+L'argument optionnel \-g lance vimtutor avec gvim plut<75>t qu'avec vim, si l'IHM
 graphique de vim est disponible, ou le lance avec vim si gvim n'est pas
 disponible.
 .PP
@@ -57,3 +57,4 @@ vim(1)
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a <20>t<EFBFBD> traduite par David Blanchet
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2004-12-27.
+Mise <20> jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pell<6C> <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>

runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.UTF-8.1

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 vimtutor \- tutoriel Vim
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .br
-.B vimtutor [-g] [langue]
+.B vimtutor [\-g] [langue]
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .B Vimtutor
 lance le tutoriel
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ est utile pour les personnes souhaitant apprendre leurs premières commandes
 .B Vim
 \.
 .PP
-L'argument optionnel -g lance vimtutor avec gvim plutôt qu'avec vim, si l'IHM
+L'argument optionnel \-g lance vimtutor avec gvim plutôt qu'avec vim, si l'IHM
 graphique de vim est disponible, ou le lance avec vim si gvim n'est pas
 disponible.
 .PP
@@ -57,3 +57,4 @@ vim(1)
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a été traduite par David Blanchet
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2004-12-27.
+Mise à jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pellé <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>

runtime/doc/visual.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*visual.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Feb 17
+*visual.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -61,15 +61,27 @@ position.
 2. Starting and stopping Visual mode			*visual-start*
 
 						*v* *characterwise-visual*
-v			start Visual mode per character.
+[count]v		Start Visual mode per character.
+			With [count] select the same number of characters or
+			lines as used for the last Visual operation, but at
+			the current cursor position, multiplied by [count].
+			When the previous Visual operation was on a block both
+			the width and height of the block are multiplied by
+			[count].
+			When there was no previous Visual operation [count]
+			characters are selected.  This is like moving the
+			cursor right N * [count] characters.  One less when
+			'selection' is not "exclusive".
 
 						*V* *linewise-visual*
-V			start Visual mode linewise.
+[count]V		Start Visual mode linewise.
+			With [count] select that many lines.
 
 						*CTRL-V* *blockwise-visual*
-CTRL-V			start Visual mode blockwise.  Note: Under Windows
+[count]CTRL-V		Start Visual mode blockwise.  Note: Under Windows
 			CTRL-V could be mapped to paste text, it doesn't work
 			to start Visual mode then, see |CTRL-V-alternative|.
+			[count] is used as with `v` above.
 
 If you use <Esc>, click the left mouse button or use any command that
 does a jump to another buffer while in Visual mode, the highlighting stops
@@ -94,6 +106,18 @@ gv			Start Visual mode with the same area as the previous
 			After using "p" or "P" in Visual mode the text that
 			was put will be selected.
 
+								*gn* *v_gn*
+gn			Search forward for the last used search pattern, like
+			with `n`, and start Visual mode to select the match.
+			If the cursor is on the match, visually selects it.
+			If an operator is pending, operates on the match.
+			E.g., "dgn" deletes the text of the next match.
+			If Visual mode is active, extends the selection
+			until the end of the next match.
+
+								*gN* *v_gN*
+gN			Like |gn| but searches backward, like with `N`.
+
 							*<LeftMouse>*
 <LeftMouse>		Set the current cursor position.  If Visual mode is
 			active it is stopped.  Only when 'mouse' option is
@@ -269,7 +293,10 @@ with {motion}, which is only ONE movement command.
 Another way to operate on the Visual area is using the |/\%V| item in a
 pattern.  For example, to replace all '(' in the Visual area with '#': >
 
-	:%s/\%V(/X/g
+	:'<,'>s/\%V(/#/g
+
+Note that the "'<,'>" will appear automatically when you press ":" in Visual
+mode.
 
 ==============================================================================
 5. Blockwise operators					*blockwise-operators*

runtime/doc/windows.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*windows.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Aug 14
+*windows.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -174,7 +174,8 @@ CTRL-W CTRL_N						*CTRL-W_CTRL-N*
 		2. WinEnter for the new window
 		3. BufLeave for the current buffer
 		4. BufEnter for the new buffer
-		This behaves like a ":split" first, and then a ":e" command.
+		This behaves like a ":split" first, and then an ":enew"
+		command.
 
 :[N]vne[w] [++opt] [+cmd] [file]			*:vne* *:vnew*
 		Like |:new|, but split vertically.  If 'equalalways' is set
@@ -183,7 +184,8 @@ CTRL-W CTRL_N						*CTRL-W_CTRL-N*
 
 :[N]new [++opt] [+cmd] {file}
 :[N]sp[lit] [++opt] [+cmd] {file}			*:split_f*
-		Create a new window and start editing file {file} in it.
+		Create a new window and start editing file {file} in it.  This
+		behaves like a ":split" first, and then an ":e" command.
 		If [+cmd] is given, execute the command when the file has been
 		loaded |+cmd|.
 		Also see |++opt|.
@@ -937,9 +939,9 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 :buffers[!]					*:buffers* *:ls*
 :ls[!]		Show all buffers.  Example:
 
-			1 #h  "/test/text"		line 1 ~
-			2u    "asdf"			line 0 ~
-			3 %a+ "version.c"		line 1 ~
+			1 #h   "/test/text"		line 1 ~
+			2u     "asdf"			line 0 ~
+			3 %a + "version.c"		line 1 ~
 
 		When the [!] is included the list will show unlisted buffers
 		(the term "unlisted" is a bit confusing then...).

runtime/doc/xxd-fr.1

@@ -393,3 +393,4 @@ Modifications mineures par Bram Moolenaar.
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a <20>t<EFBFBD> traduite par David Blanchet
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2004-12-24.
+Mise <20> jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pell<6C> <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>

runtime/doc/xxd-fr.UTF-8.1

@@ -393,3 +393,4 @@ Modifications mineures par Bram Moolenaar.
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a été traduite par David Blanchet
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2004-12-24.
+Mise à jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pellé <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>

runtime/filetype.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim support file to detect file types
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2012 Feb 05
+" Last Change:	2012 Nov 28
 
 " Listen very carefully, I will say this only once
 if exists("did_load_filetypes")
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ augroup filetypedetect
 
 " Ignored extensions
 if exists("*fnameescape")
-au BufNewFile,BufRead ?\+.orig,?\+.bak,?\+.old,?\+.new,?\+.dpkg-dist,?\+.dpkg-old,?\+.rpmsave,?\+.rpmnew
+au BufNewFile,BufRead ?\+.orig,?\+.bak,?\+.old,?\+.new,?\+.dpkg-dist,?\+.dpkg-old,?\+.dpkg-new,?\+.dpkg-bak,?\+.rpmsave,?\+.rpmnew
 	\ exe "doau filetypedetect BufRead " . fnameescape(expand("<afile>:r"))
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *~
 	\ let s:name = expand("<afile>") |
@@ -128,6 +128,11 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead .asoundrc,*/usr/share/alsa/alsa.conf,*/etc/asound.conf set
 " Arc Macro Language
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.aml			setf aml
 
+" APT config file
+au BufNewFile,BufRead apt.conf                 setf aptconf
+au BufNewFile,BufRead */.aptitude/config       setf aptconf
+au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/apt/apt.conf.d/{[-_[:alnum:]]\+,[-_.[:alnum:]]\+.conf} setf aptconf
+
 " Arch Inventory file
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .arch-inventory,=tagging-method	setf arch
 
@@ -239,8 +244,8 @@ func! s:FTVB(alt)
   endif
 endfunc
 
-" Visual Basic Script (close to Visual Basic)
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.vbs,*.dsm,*.ctl		setf vb
+" Visual Basic Script (close to Visual Basic) or Visual Basic .NET
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.vb,*.vbs,*.dsm,*.ctl	setf vb
 
 " IBasic file (similar to QBasic)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.iba,*.ibi		setf ibasic
@@ -367,7 +372,11 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.h			call s:FTheader()
 
 func! s:FTheader()
   if match(getline(1, min([line("$"), 200])), '^@\(interface\|end\|class\)') > -1
-    setf objc
+    if exists("g:c_syntax_for_h")
+      setf objc
+    else
+      setf objcpp
+    endif
   elseif exists("g:c_syntax_for_h")
     setf c
   elseif exists("g:ch_syntax_for_h")
@@ -629,6 +638,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.dsl			setf dsl
 " DTD (Document Type Definition for XML)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.dtd			setf dtd
 
+" DTS/DSTI (device tree files)
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.dts,*.dtsi		setf dts
+
 " EDIF (*.edf,*.edif,*.edn,*.edo)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ed\(f\|if\|n\|o\)	setf edif
 
@@ -731,9 +743,11 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mo,*.gdmo		setf gdmo
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ged,lltxxxxx.txt	setf gedcom
 
 " Git
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.git/COMMIT_EDITMSG setf gitcommit
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.git/COMMIT_EDITMSG 	setf gitcommit
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.git/config,.gitconfig,.gitmodules setf gitconfig
-au BufNewFile,BufRead git-rebase-todo      setf gitrebase
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.git/modules/**/COMMIT_EDITMSG setf gitcommit
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.git/modules/**/config 	setf gitconfig
+au BufNewFile,BufRead git-rebase-todo      	setf gitrebase
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .msg.[0-9]*
       \ if getline(1) =~ '^From.*# This line is ignored.$' |
       \   setf gitsendemail |
@@ -1113,6 +1127,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.nb			setf mma
 " Maya Extension Language
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mel			setf mel
 
+" Mercurial (hg) commit file
+au BufNewFile,BufRead hg-editor-*.txt		setf hgcommit
+
 " Mercurial config (looks like generic config file)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.hgrc,*hgrc		setf cfg
 
@@ -1194,7 +1211,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mysql			setf mysql
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/Muttrc.d/*		call s:StarSetf('muttrc')
 
 " M$ Resource files
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.rc			setf rc
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.rc,*.rch		setf rc
 
 " MuPAD source
 au BufRead,BufNewFile *.mu			setf mupad
@@ -1261,7 +1278,7 @@ endfunc
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.nqc			setf nqc
 
 " NSIS
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.nsi			setf nsis
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.nsi,*.nsh		setf nsis
 
 " OCAML
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ml,*.mli,*.mll,*.mly,.ocamlinit	setf ocaml
@@ -1549,7 +1566,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.reg
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.rib			setf rib
 
 " Rexx
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.rexx,*.rex,*.jrexx,*.rxj,*.orx	setf rexx
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.rex,*.orx,*.rxo,*.rxj,*.jrexx,*.rexxj,*.rexx,*.testGroup,*.testUnit	setf rexx
 
 " R (Splus)
 if has("fname_case")
@@ -1728,7 +1745,8 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sgm,*.sgml
 	\ if getline(1).getline(2).getline(3).getline(4).getline(5) =~? 'linuxdoc' |
 	\   setf sgmllnx |
 	\ elseif getline(1) =~ '<!DOCTYPE.*DocBook' || getline(2) =~ '<!DOCTYPE.*DocBook' |
-	\   let b:docbk_type="sgml" |
+	\   let b:docbk_type = "sgml" |
+	\   let b:docbk_ver = 4 |
 	\   setf docbk |
 	\ else |
 	\   setf sgml |
@@ -1763,6 +1781,10 @@ func! SetFileTypeSH(name)
     " Some .sh scripts contain #!/bin/tcsh.
     call SetFileTypeShell("tcsh")
     return
+  elseif a:name =~ '\<zsh\>'
+    " Some .sh scripts contain #!/bin/zsh.
+    call SetFileTypeShell("zsh")
+    return
   elseif a:name =~ '\<ksh\>'
     let b:is_kornshell = 1
     if exists("b:is_bash")
@@ -1836,7 +1858,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead .zsh*,.zlog*,.zcompdump*  call s:StarSetf('zsh')
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.zsh			setf zsh
 
 " Scheme
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.scm,*.ss		setf scheme
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.scm,*.ss,*.rkt		setf scheme
 
 " Screen RC
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .screenrc,screenrc	setf screen
@@ -1863,6 +1885,8 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.st			setf st
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.cls
 	\ if getline(1) =~ '^%' |
 	\  setf tex |
+	\ elseif getline(1)[0] == '#' && getline(1) =~ 'rexx' |
+	\  setf rexx |
 	\ else |
 	\  setf st |
 	\ endif
@@ -2138,6 +2162,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufReadPost *.tssop		setf tssop
 " TSS - Command Line (temporary)
 au BufNewFile,BufReadPost *.tsscl		setf tsscl
 
+" TWIG files
+au BufNewFile,BufReadPost *.twig		setf twig
+
 " Motif UIT/UIL files
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.uit,*.uil		setf uil
 
@@ -2281,8 +2308,16 @@ func! s:FTxml()
   let n = 1
   while n < 100 && n < line("$")
     let line = getline(n)
-    if line =~ '<!DOCTYPE.*DocBook'
+    " DocBook 4 or DocBook 5.
+    let is_docbook4 = line =~ '<!DOCTYPE.*DocBook'
+    let is_docbook5 = line =~ ' xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"'
+    if is_docbook4 || is_docbook5
       let b:docbk_type = "xml"
+      if is_docbook5
+	let b:docbk_ver = 5
+      else
+	let b:docbk_ver = 4
+      endif
       setf docbk
       return
     endif
@@ -2317,6 +2352,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead fglrxrc			setf xml
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xlf			setf xml
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xliff			setf xml
 
+" XML User Interface Language
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xul			setf xml
+
 " X11 xmodmap (also see below)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *Xmodmap			setf xmodmap
 
@@ -2359,6 +2397,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.yaml,*.yml		setf yaml
 " yum conf (close enough to dosini)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/yum.conf 		setf dosini
 
+" Zimbu
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.zu 			setf zimbu
+
 " Zope
 "   dtml (zope dynamic template markup language), pt (zope page template),
 "   cpt (zope form controller page template)

runtime/ftplugin/abaqus.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:     Abaqus finite element input file (www.abaqus.com)
 " Maintainer:   Carl Osterwisch <osterwischc@asme.org>
-" Last Change:  2008 Oct 5
+" Last Change:  2012 Apr 30
 
 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin") | finish | endif
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ if has("gui_win32") && !exists("b:browsefilter")
     \ "Abaqus Results (*.dat)\t*.dat\n" .
     \ "Abaqus Messages (*.pre *.msg *.sta)\t*.pre;*.msg;*.sta\n" .
     \ "All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
-    let b:undo_ftplugin .= "|unlet b:browsefilter"
+    let b:undo_ftplugin .= "|unlet! b:browsefilter"
 endif
 
 " Define patterns for the matchit plugin
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ if exists("loaded_matchit") && !exists("b:match_words")
     \ '\*assembly:\*end\s*assembly,' .
     \ '\*instance:\*end\s*instance,' .
     \ '\*step:\*end\s*step'
-    let b:undo_ftplugin .= "|unlet b:match_ignorecase b:match_words"
+    let b:undo_ftplugin .= "|unlet! b:match_ignorecase b:match_words"
 endif
 
 " Define keys used to move [count] keywords backward or forward.
@@ -85,5 +85,13 @@ endfunction
 let b:undo_ftplugin .= "|unmap <buffer> [[|unmap <buffer> ]]"
     \ . "|unmap <buffer> <LocalLeader><LocalLeader>"
 
+" Undo must be done in nocompatible mode for <LocalLeader>.
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "let s:cpo_save = &cpoptions|"
+    \ . "set cpoptions&vim|"
+    \ . b:undo_ftplugin
+    \ . "|let &cpoptions = s:cpo_save"
+    \ . "|unlet s:cpo_save"
+
 " Restore saved compatibility options
 let &cpoptions = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/ftplugin/ant.vim

@@ -41,3 +41,4 @@ let b:undo_ftplugin = "unlet! b:browsefilter | " . s:undo_ftplugin
 
 " Restore the saved compatibility options.
 let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo

runtime/ftplugin/art.vim

@@ -12,5 +12,4 @@ endif
 run ftplugin/lisp.vim
 
 setl lw-=if
-setl lw+=def-art-fun,deffacts,defglobal,defrule,defschema,
-      \for,schema,while
+setl lw+=def-art-fun,deffacts,defglobal,defrule,defschema,for,schema,while

runtime/ftplugin/aspvbs.vim

@@ -57,3 +57,4 @@ let b:undo_ftplugin = "unlet! b:match_words b:match_ignorecase b:browsefilter |
 
 " Restore the saved compatibility options.
 let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo

runtime/ftplugin/c.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	C
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2011 Aug 04
+" Last Change:	2012 Jul 10
 
 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ let b:match_words = &matchpairs . ',^\s*#\s*if\(\|def\|ndef\)\>:^\s*#\s*elif\>:^
 let b:match_skip = 's:comment\|string\|character'
 
 " Win32 can filter files in the browse dialog
-if has("gui_win32") && !exists("b:browsefilter")
+if (has("gui_win32") || has("gui_gtk")) && !exists("b:browsefilter")
   if &ft == "cpp"
     let b:browsefilter = "C++ Source Files (*.cpp *.c++)\t*.cpp;*.c++\n" .
 	  \ "C Header Files (*.h)\t*.h\n" .

runtime/ftplugin/changelog.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:         generic Changelog file
 " Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
-" Latest Revision:  2011-05-02
+" Latest Revision:  2012-08-23
 " Variables:
 "   g:changelog_timeformat (deprecated: use g:changelog_dateformat instead) -
 "       description: the timeformat used in ChangeLog entries.
@@ -106,10 +106,10 @@ if &filetype == 'changelog'
 
   function! s:passwd_field(line, field)
     let fields = split(a:line, ':', 1)
-    if len(fields) < field
+    if len(fields) < a:field
       return ""
     endif
-    return fields[field - 1]
+    return fields[a:field - 1]
   endfunction
 
   function! s:capitalize(word)

runtime/ftplugin/config.vim

@@ -39,3 +39,4 @@ let b:undo_ftplugin = "unlet! b:browsefilter | " . b:undo_ftplugin
 
 " Restore the saved compatibility options.
 let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo

runtime/ftplugin/cs.vim

@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ endif
 
 " Don't load another plugin for this buffer
 let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
 " Set 'formatoptions' to break comment lines but not other lines,
 " and insert the comment leader when hitting <CR> or using "o".
@@ -22,3 +24,6 @@ if has("gui_win32") && !exists("b:browsefilter")
     let b:browsefilter = "C# Source Files (*.cs)\t*.cs\n" .
 		       \ "All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
 endif
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo

runtime/ftplugin/csc.vim

@@ -24,3 +24,4 @@ let b:undo_ftplugin = "unlet! b:match_words"
 
 " Restore the saved compatibility options.
 let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo

runtime/ftplugin/csh.vim

@@ -45,3 +45,4 @@ let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal commentstring< formatoptions<" .
 
 " Restore the saved compatibility options.
 let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo

runtime/ftplugin/docbk.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	    DocBook
 " Maintainer:	    Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
-" Latest Revision:  2010-10-14
+" Latest Revision:  2012-04-25
 
 if exists('b:did_ftplugin')
   finish
@@ -20,3 +20,5 @@ if b:docbk_type == 'sgml'
 else
   runtime! ftplugin/xml.vim ftplugin/xml_*.vim ftplugin/xml/*.vim
 endif
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "unlet! b:docbk_type"

runtime/ftplugin/dosbatch.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:    MS-DOS .bat files
 " Maintainer:  Mike Williams <mrw@eandem.co.uk>
-" Last Change: 27th May 2009
+" Last Change: 8th May 2012
 
 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
@@ -11,6 +11,9 @@ endif
 " Don't load another plugin for this buffer
 let b:did_ftplugin = 1
 
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
 " BAT comment formatting
 setlocal comments=b:rem,b:@rem,b:REM,b:@REM,:::
 setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=rol
@@ -19,3 +22,9 @@ setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=rol
 if has("gui_win32") && !exists("b:browsefilter")
   let b:browsefilter = "DOS Batch Files (*.bat, *.cmd)\t*.bat;*.cmd\nAll Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
 endif
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal comments< formatoptions<"
+    \ . "| unlet! b:browsefiler"
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/ftplugin/dtd.vim

@@ -37,3 +37,4 @@ let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal commentstring< comments< formatoptions<" .
 
 " Restore the saved compatibility options.
 let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo

runtime/ftplugin/erlang.vim

@@ -19,6 +19,9 @@ else
 	let s:did_function_definitions = 1
 endif
 
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
 if !exists('g:erlang_keywordprg')
 	let g:erlang_keywordprg = 'erl -man'
 endif
@@ -76,3 +79,9 @@ function ErlangFoldText()
 endfunction
 
 call s:SetErlangOptions()
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal foldmethod< foldexpr< foldtext<"
+	\ . " comments< commentstring< formatoptions<"
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save